JP6787307B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Some game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines have a plurality of game setting values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the game set value may be suggested to the player by a predetermined effect.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-024234

By the way, as a game machine, it is important to raise the degree of attention and interest in the game to improve the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game and improving the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A game board (31) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is set, and
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) provided in the game area and the prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls, and
Discharge ports (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board.
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area above at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) and for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board. ,
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, etc.), which is an index indicating the ball ejection performance,
The performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed, and
The performance information display control means (41) that causes the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information, and
A visual restriction means (39) capable of accommodating a game ball that has entered the special discharge port (363) by making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see.
The visibility limiting means (39) is controlled on condition that the game ball is inserted into the visibility limiting means (39), and at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means (37a) is displayed. Visible state control means (51) that makes it visible,
Anomaly determining means (51) for determining whether the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means (37a) is the target visual state of the performance information.
The first state in which the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) is allowed to enter the visibility limiting means (39), and the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363). Switching means (319B) that can be switched between the second state that restricts entry into the visibility limiting means (39), and
When the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual state of the performance information is not the desired visual state, the switching control means (319B) controls the switching means (319B) to the second state. 51) and
It is characterized by having.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the game machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control unit schematically. The figure which shows the display example on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The figure which shows the display example in the game setting value display part of the performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the first hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start processing executed in the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information which is updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27. The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between the operation detection pattern and the operation situation. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 31. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 31. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a ball ejection performance suggestion image display process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 31. The figure which shows an example of the game setting value suggestion character type which suggests a game setting value. FIG. 34 is an example of a game setting value suggestion character selection table used in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process. FIG. 34 is an example of a character mode selection table used in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. FIG. 34 is an example of a character mode selection table used in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the ball ejection performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display part in a variable game. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 31. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an opening basic effect selection table used in the opening effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40. The figure which shows an example of the rank suggestion image type which suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number. The figure which shows an example of the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used in the opening effect decision processing. The figure which shows an example of the opening screen in a jackpot game. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of an ending basic effect selection table and a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used in the ending effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40. The figure which shows an example of the ending screen in a jackpot game. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode production scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing. The figure which shows an example of the round game character selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing, and the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table. The figure which shows an example of the round game screen of the open / close execution mode in a jackpot game. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27. The figure which shows another example of the ball ejection performance suggestion image in a variable game. The figure which shows another example of the ball ejection performance suggestion image in a variable game. The figure which shows another example of the round game screen of the open / close execution mode in a jackpot game. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a command judgment process. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game production process. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a round game effect start process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a ball ejection performance suggestion image display process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing in the command determination processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the point table and the total point rank correspondence table used in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a total point suggestion character selection table referred to in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process in the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank corresponding table, and FIG. 64 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank suggested character selection table used in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 63. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. A front view showing an enlarged main part of the game machine shown in FIG. 65. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing an example of the Kroon device of the game machine shown in FIG. 65. 68 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 69 (A) is a front view showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is in the upper limit position, FIG. 69 (B) is a vertical sectional view of FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 69 (C) is FIG. 69 (C). A cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of A). FIG. 70 (A) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (B) showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is in the lower limit position, and FIG. 70 (B) is a retention box when the retention box is in the lower limit position. FIG. 70 (C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing and the periphery thereof, and FIG. 70 (C) shows the retention box and its periphery when the retention box is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. FIG. 70 (D) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is in the intermediate position. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. 65. FIG. 72 (A) is a front view showing an example of the special main display unit, and FIG. 72 (B) is a diagram showing a display example of the special main display unit. The figure which shows typically the visual state of the special main display part at the lower movement level 0-2. 74 (A) and 74 (A) are diagrams schematically showing the visual state of the special main display unit at the lower movement levels 3 and 4, and FIG. 74 (C) shows the number of stagnant game balls in the dwell box and the dwell box. The figure which shows the relationship with the down movement level. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the stay box return processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75. The front view which shows an example of the Kroon apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention and its periphery. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. FIG. 81 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of the special main display unit and the translucent monitor, and FIG. 81 (B) shows an example of the relationship between the visual level of the translucent monitor and the visual state of the special main display unit. FIG. 81 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special out-ball counts and the visibility level of the translucent monitor. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 82. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of visual control processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of shading control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 82. The figure which shows another example of the relationship between the visibility level and the visibility state of a special main display part. FIG. 87 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the plurality of areas and the visual state of the special main display unit, and FIG. 87 (B) is another example of the relationship between the visual level and the visual state of the special main display unit. The figure which shows. The front view which shows the main part of the gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in an enlarged manner. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X5-X5 cutting line of FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89 when the forced discharge member is in the operating position. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of an area including a retention box and a special main display unit in a game machine. 92 (A) and 92 (B) are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the downward movement level of the retention box and the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor and the lower limit position detection sensor, and FIG. 92 (C) is a translucent monitor. The figure which shows the visual control state of the special main display part by. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the stay box operation check process executed by the voice lamp control device. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the retention box operation check process of FIG. 94. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the stay box return processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75.

Hereinafter, the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 51.

[Outline configuration of game machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the game machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the game machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 31 of the game machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in this embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is executed triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined specific period in the variable game production executed in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is clearly shown to the player. Operation buttons Operated to execute effects.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by the player of the touch key. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect and the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used for storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect for outputting audio. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect according to a blinking mode such as a lighting color, lighting or extinguishing.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the game machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34 and a main display unit 37 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321 and a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching the game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening opening 318. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. Further, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, which will be described later. It is detected by the out-ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5). Further, the through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when it is hitting right, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are sent to the main control unit 331. Entered. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of launched game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but are arbitrary sensors capable of individually detecting the ball entry of a game ball by another detection method. You may.

Further, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b opens to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric accessory 315b closes to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. The sphere is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 316b allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening / closing door 316b closes the opening / closing door 316 to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. Door.

In the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls will be paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316. If so, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the game machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game shifts to the big hit game state (special game state), and the variable winning opening 316 is opened, which will be described later in the round game (unit game). ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the jackpot lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is won, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, there are five round games (unit games) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) or more game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, compared to the 5R jackpot game state. It is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the entry into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. Various displays such as an effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. .. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols fluctuate along the preset fluctuation directions (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are stopped in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state in which the main symbols of the same symbol are lined up in the effective line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot. Will be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by the combination of the main symbols on the effective line, but it is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a state in which, for example, "777" symbol combinations are lined up in an effective line, which is set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols. Is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating 5R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, are lined up in the effective line is displayed. Or, a state in which the same combination of symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot such as "777" and "333" is lined up in the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of the main symbols which is set in advance as the symbol combination indicating the normal jackpot, for example, the combination of the symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot such as "222" and "444". A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable display of the main symbol in the variable game and a variable game effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. If the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that the 5R is a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that is is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

A sub-image display unit 38 such as a liquid crystal display is provided in the left side region on the front side of the design display unit 341. In the sub-image display unit 38, a game effect is executed together with the symbol display unit 341 in a variable game or a jackpot game. In addition, the sub-image display unit 38 executes an effect of suggesting information (performance information) regarding the ball ejection performance in the variable game or the jackpot game to the player. The details of the performance information will be described later, but the performance information includes, for example, a game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous bonus ratio information, bonus ratio information, and the like. The sub-image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

Further, it is conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 using a magnet is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided around, for example, the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372, 373, and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. In the LED pair 371, the result of a lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern), triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 317. In the 7-segment display 372, the variation display of the symbol is performed triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, the variation display of the symbol is performed triggered by the winning of the second winning opening 315, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the holding number N and the holding number M of the fluctuation display generated by winning the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are displayed by the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing the ball game balls supplied from the island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 5, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island facility (not shown) to which the game machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the game machine 10.

[System configuration of game machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes the main control of the game in the game machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 has or does not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the entry sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 gives the voice lamp control device 5 a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, and a game setting value. Output commands such as change command and unit jackpot lottery count update command.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the main display unit 37 is started. To. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command are the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (FIG. 15 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process.

The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 when the hold number N or the hold number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the pass / fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 18 described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and when shifting to the jackpot game state, FIG. 16 described later. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process of. Further, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, the voice lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also the opening can be grasped. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command so that the voice lamp control device 5 knows that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the number of rounds of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. , Set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it can be grasped that the opening is ended and the open / close execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command. Alternatively, the open / close execution mode start command may be set when the open / close execution mode starts. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later.

The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is a command in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later. Is set in.

The unit jackpot lottery update command is issued to the first winning opening 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls (for example, minus 250 balls) in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode). It is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery is received) triggered by winning a prize, and is the identification of FIG. 21 described later. It is updated in step S1805 in the performance information update process.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 is interrupted by the main timer described later every time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the interrupt process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time by using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric service hold area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. Is done. Further, the lottery counter 412a is set to the normal hit random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is in the electric service open state, and the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. The normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The hold storage area 412b includes a first hold storage area REA, a second hold storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a hold number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the first special symbol game. is there. The second hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a hold number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the 7-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display is referred to as the second special symbol game. is there.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acceptance / rejection information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counters 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS1, etc.) are individually corresponding to the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. It may be provided in.

As described above, in the game machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the REA4 and the second hold storage area REB.

Therefore, a big hit lottery for a variable game executed based on the hit / fail information stored in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 and the second hold storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of, it is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where it is. In the hold number storage area NAA, the number of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NAB, the number of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number M.

That is, in the game machine 10, the first winning opening 314 has a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to reserve up to four winning / failing information as a winning history for the second winning opening 315.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum number of holdings of eight, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be held in total. It is possible to withhold the winning / failing information as the winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB when the symbol change display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is a storage area used for moving the pass / fail information stored in. Specifically, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the pass / fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the validity information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Further, it is also considered as another embodiment that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA and the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the hit / miss information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REA2 shifts to the first hold area REA1 and the third The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second hold area REB2 shifts to the first hold area REB1 and is held third. The pass / fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second hold area REB2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REB4 shifts to the third hold area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Two types of random number values for winning the jackpot are set according to the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probability variation game state. Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B), the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit (big hit probability) is set as the game setting value as the low probability mode hit / miss table and the high probability mode hit / miss table, respectively. A plurality of different pass / fail tables are provided depending on the situation. The low-probability mode pass / fail table and the high-probability mode pass / fail table each include four win / fail tables corresponding to the four-stage game setting values 1 to 4. In the order of the game set value 4, the game set value 3, the game set value 2, and the game set value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

In the game setting value 1, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode winning / failing tables is 824 (0 to 823). That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79. 5 (824/65536).

In the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 213 (0 to 212) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. There are 852 (0 to 851) probability mode hit / miss tables. That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/307.7 (213/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/76. 9 (852/65536).

In the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 220 (0 to 219) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode winning / failing tables is 880 (0 to 879). That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 297.9 (220/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/74. 5 (880/65536).

In the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 227 (0 to 226) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 908 (0 to 907). That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 288.7 (227/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/72, which is about 4 times that in the low probability mode. 2 (908/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number values for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be missed.

Here, in the low-probability mode win / fail table and the high-probability mode win / fail table, the random numbers that are the big hits in the big hit lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also considered that the random numbers that are the big hits are not common. Be done. Further, the random numbers that win the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

Further, four low-probability mode hit / miss tables and four high-probability mode hit / miss tables are provided according to the four-stage game setting, but at least one win / miss table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting is not limited to four stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode hit / miss tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game settings, while providing one high-probability mode hit / miss table. That is, it is conceivable to set a plurality of stages for the low probability mode and not provide a stepwise game setting for the high probability mode to make the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of stages of game settings may be provided for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the game machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (C), when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that becomes the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9. The number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are 5R normal jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that become the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variation jackpot. The number of random numbers is 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the game machine 10 is a so-called loop probability change machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the game machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), the jackpot is compared with the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode). When the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit, the expected value of the game ball is set high.

In this embodiment, individual swings are made for each of the first winning opening 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 the game ball wins, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also possible that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same as that of the game. Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixer, or the like.

Then, in the MPU 41, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", and "5R normal" based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Determine whether it is a "big hit" or a "missing".

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the player shifts to a probability variation game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, in the present embodiment, the probability variation game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the player shifts to a time-saving game state in which the jackpot winning probability is low and the electric accessory 315b is open in a high frequency support mode. Then, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery result in a predetermined number of jackpot lottery, such as 50 times and 100 times. It ends when the player decides that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit before the lapse of the specified number of times.

By the way, when the game machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, 50 times, 100 times) are set after the end of the jackpot game at the time of the probability change jackpot. When the lottery is executed in the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the big hit lottery does not become a big hit by the lapse of the specified number of times, the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency mode) (Support mode) is entered, and the high-frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is also conceivable to perform a fall lottery from the probabilistic game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state as another embodiment. If the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of order, the game state is not changed to the big hit game state or the time saving game state. In the present embodiment, a case where the game machine 10 has three types of jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2 round probability variation jackpot, 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot and 16R regular jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

In the game machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the out-of-type table stored in the out-of-type table storage area in ROM 411, the last stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the front-back off reach and the reach are also generated. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which reach does not occur, is set.

Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (D), the value of the random number that is out of front and back is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is reach other than front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of line is 39. ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game in which the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the reach indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or an operation by the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processing.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. For example, it is considered that the winning is won when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the loss is considered when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the variation pattern type in this way, the voice lamp control device 5 has a rough variation game effect such as a high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, and a special reach effect. The type is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern with reference to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411. In addition, these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for each low-probability mode and high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 8 (A), 8 (B), and 8 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table, and a deviation fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 8 (A), 8 (B) and 8 (C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table and the deviation fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preliminarily set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a probability variation jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", and a lottery. If the result is "off", refer to the out-of-variation table and specify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8 (A) and 8 (B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” are obtained according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. When the variation pattern "01" is selected here, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern having a variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the normal reach effect pattern. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the super reach effect. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest variation display time of 90s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the special reach effect pattern. The production pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 8C, in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 is used for each stop type (reach before and after deviation, reach other than front and rear deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between and the fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341 (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 10 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at the deviation pattern without accompanying the advance notice effect of displaying characters, messages, etc. Is executed. Further, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the deviation pattern that stops at the deviation pattern is displayed with a notice effect of displaying a character, a message, or the like. Will be executed. Further, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

The type of fluctuation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8 (A), 8 (B) and 8 (C). Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", and any of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. One of the super reach effects that have been made is performed. The super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach production, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is higher than the normal reach production, and the big hit is won more than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Further, in the game machine 10, as a special reach effect executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and a selection is made from among them. One of the special reach effects that have been made is performed. The special reach effect is a reach effect having a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

The effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a one-shot operation effect in which the one-shot operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation button 20 by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU41 has a fluctuation pattern command "A" in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Output any one of "A01" to "A03". Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "B01" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "B03". Further, the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "C01" in which, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is added before the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "C03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating that the lottery is out are added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". Output any of. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 according to the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

As described above, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the game machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the big hit lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball ejection performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as game information, "number of out balls", "number of general winning lots paid out", "number of first winning lots paid out", "number of second winning lots paid out" , "Variable winning slot payout number", "Game setting value", "Base information", "Continuous character ratio information", "Character ratio information", "Cumulative jackpot lottery count", "Unit jackpot lottery number of times" , "Number of jackpots", and "Number of consecutive misses" are stored. Of these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "continuous bonus ratio information", "feature ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number of times" are game information (performance) related to ball ejection performance. Information).

The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in the normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13, which will be described later.

The "general winning opening payout number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the general winning opening 313 in a normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening" is set to the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning to the general winning opening 313 is detected by the winning sensor 313a in the normal game state. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the general prize opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this prize. ..

The "number of balls paid out in the first winning opening" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning a prize in the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (a state in which the probability mode is low and the support mode is not high frequency). .. This "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning to the first winning opening 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting a prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the first prize opening 314 in the command setting process. Update to.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning opening" is the total value of the game balls paid out for winning the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving game state (the state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode). .. This "number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning to the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 315a in the time-saving game state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting a prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the second prize opening 315 in the command setting process. Update to.

The "variable winning slot payout number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the variable winning slot 316 in the jackpot game state (a state in which the high probability mode is in the high frequency support mode). This "variable winning opening payout number" is set as the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later when the winning of the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the winning ball sensor 316a in the jackpot game state. When setting a prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning of the variable winning opening 316 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this winning. ..

The "number of out balls", "number of general winning lots paid out", "number of first winning lots paid out", "number of second winning lots paid out" and "number of variable winning lots paid out" are shown in the figures below. In the specific performance information update process of 21, when the "number of out balls" reaches 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), it is cleared to 0 balls (step S1810).

The "game set value" is for selecting a low-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A) and a high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail determination). .. In other words, the "game setting value" defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, four-stage game settings (four types of low-probability mode hit / miss tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 7 (A)) and high-probability mode hit / miss tables (see FIG. 7 (B))). Is being prepared. The "game setting value" is updated in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later.

The "base information" is information about the "base" which is the refund rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (the state of the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode), and this "base" is the normal game state. It is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the "number of out balls" in "the number of balls to be paid out in the general winning lot" and "the number of balls to be paid out in the first winning lot". When the "base" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("general winning slot payout number" + "first winning slot payout number") / "out ball number". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the "base" when the latest number of out balls reaches 60,000 is the previous 60,000 base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 is It is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the current base BL is calculated as the current base BL (step S1803), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the history of the past two 60,000 ball bases. However, the 60,000-ball base for the past three times or more may be left as a history. Further, as the "base information", the cumulative base from the time when the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present may be included.

"Continuous character ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. Is information on the "continuous bonus ratio", which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning lots. When the "continuous bonus ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "continuous bonus ratio" = 100 x "variable winning lot payout number" / "total payout number". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous accessory ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous accessory ratio from the time when the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "continuous bonus ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal gaming state. , The ratio of continuous bonuses to a certain number of out balls (for example, the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)) may be used. Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. , Information on the "feature ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out to the number of balls paid out in the second winning opening and the number of balls paid out in the variable winning opening. When the "feature ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "feature ratio" = 100 x ("second winning slot payout number" + "variable winning slot payout number") / "total payout number". The “accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the "character ratio information" is stored as the cumulative character ratio from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "feature ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal game state. It may be a bonus ratio to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is set in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode) from the start of the game machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present. This is the number of times the jackpot lottery was held. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is also the cumulative fluctuation display number of times when the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed with the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state as a trigger. is there. The “cumulative jackpot lottery number” is added by 1 each time the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 19, which will be described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

"Number of unit jackpot lottery" is a jackpot lottery triggered by winning a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode) to the first winning opening 314. It is the number of times received (the number of times that the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout number" and the "first winning opening payout number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery count" is the number of symbol fluctuation displays (the number of jackpot lottery received) of the 7-segment display 372 on average for 1000 yen when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen at the game hall. is there. The "unit jackpot lottery number" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The “unit jackpot lottery number” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot lottery" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or until a certain number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal game state. It may be for the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "number of unit jackpot lottery", both the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery and the number of unit jackpot lottery in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery conducted from the start of the game machine 10 to the present before the opening of the game hall is a jackpot. The "number of jackpots" is added by 1 each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later. Further, the "big hit count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively missed in the normal game state (the state of the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode), and the lottery result is the jackpot. In some cases, it is cleared 0 times. The "number of consecutive deviations" is the result of the hit / fail determination based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 when the symbol change display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the change start process of FIG. If it is off, it is added by 1 and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. In the present embodiment, the "continuous disconnection count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10. Of course, the "number of consecutive disconnections" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

Returning to the description of FIG. 5, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "game setting value" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game setting value display unit 45, a setting value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 10, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" in the game machine 10, and is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. It may be provided in. It is also conceivable to display "base information" by using the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37.

The 7-segment display 431 to 434 can display the numbers "0" to "9" and the alphabets "A" to "F". In the 7-segment display 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet "B", a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Further, when displaying any of the alphabets of "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light the dots to clearly indicate that the odor is an alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviation, and the right two 7 segments. The display 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviations "BL" of the current base BL are "8." and "L" in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432 which are the identification segments. Is displayed as, and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 which are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power on / off of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by a pressing operation, and is in a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded. It is provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the operation of turning on the power of the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power is turned off for the performance display switch 44, the energization of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. .. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 11 is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are in the off state, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 11B to 11D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, as "base information", the current base BL → the previous 60,000 The ball base B1 → 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time → the current base BL are looped in this order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 11C, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. 11D shows. In the example shown in, it is shown that the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% two times before. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

The program required to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, the current base BL, the program that calculates the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for displaying BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in order at regular time intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous character ratio information" and "character ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the game setting value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A) and the high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B) referred to in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned game setting value for the purpose, and is composed of a 7-segment display. The game setting value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, but may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display, and the performance display monitor 43 is used. The game setting value may be displayed.

The setting value changing operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by pressing the operation, and makes it possible to change the game setting value by rotating the 7-segment display when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value changing operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotation operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display example on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the off state and the setting value changing operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized to generate the game setting value. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game set value is "1". On the other hand, when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lit state and a pressing operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, the 7-segment display is cut off and the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off. It becomes a state.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the game setting value display unit 45 is lit and the setting value changing operation unit 46 is rotated, the numbers displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 change. Will be done. In the illustrated example, the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated clockwise to increase the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, and the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated counterclockwise to display the game setting value. The number displayed in unit 45 becomes smaller. Then, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45, the changed number is saved as the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. To. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed with the number corresponding to the target game setting value displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 and the power of the 7-segment display is turned off, the power is turned on. The number displayed immediately before being turned off is determined as the game setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 has a low-probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 7 (A)) or a high-probability mode pass / fail table (FIG. 7 (B)) selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Can be used as a jackpot lottery.

The method of changing the game setting value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. For example, a method of determining a game set value by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or by repeatedly hitting or holding down the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). A method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, or by inserting the key into the keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key. A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 may be used.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in the variable game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect described later.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. As another embodiment, the display control device 6 may receive a command from the main control device 4 and input the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment is also conceivable in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26 and an illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect depending on the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes a predetermined arithmetic process based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 has a variation pattern (a combination of stop symbols of the main symbol (see FIG. 32 (A)), a variation display time, and a variation type (FIG. 32) based on the variation pattern command. (See (B)))) and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (C)) are determined, and a display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (FIG. 31). In step S23057 in the command determination process of (1), the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates an deviation, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. Further, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a ball ejection performance suggestion image display process for displaying the ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the ball ejection performance on the sub image display unit 38.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as a variable symbol such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a preview effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and a missed effect image. ing. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball rental device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the game machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal indicating that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to obtain a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation control amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. When the launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with his thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the game machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the game machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for being charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, when the power control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, the power control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control unit 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 26. Specifically, in the game machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In this embodiment, the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 13, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the like is determined. At this time, when the MPU 41 detects that the game ball has entered any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information. Further, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. To do. The number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d is cleared to 0 when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is calculated by reaching 60,000 balls (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 added 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reached the maximum value. If so, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process (step S1004) accompanying the winning of the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and executes the firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the firing of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 gives an instruction to launch the game ball to the launch control device 8 when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is set to the electric service open state based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency support mode flag. Then, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. Judge that. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and disengages when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Judge that. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been won in the through gate processing, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second winning opening 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged side by side.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 14, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the first winning opening 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the first winning opening 314 has won a prize (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it determines that the first winning opening 314 has not won a prize (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 13, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 16). And S1313), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the content of the hit / miss information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the variable start processing (S1408 in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) described later. After confirming, the first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the second winning opening 315 has won a prize (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it determines that the second winning opening 315 has not won a prize (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holdings M is the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number M is not the maximum hold number (step S1107: No), 1 is added to the hold number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 13, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 16). And S1313), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 receives the hit / fail information before the hit / miss information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a target for determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 17, FIG. 19) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 15, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 15, if the "first hold command" is read as the "second hold command" and the "hold number N" is read as the "hold number M". Good.

[1st hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type (big hit type or deviation) of the first hold command, the fluctuation pattern, and the number of holds N. .. Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412 (step). S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process shifts to step S1203, and if it is not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to turn on whether or not it is in the high probability mode at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 of FIG. 16) in the main process described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is based on the high probability mode flag that is set to off when transitioning to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 7B) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. Based on the winning / failing table, the winning / failing determination of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 7 (A)) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. Based on the probability mode winning / failing table, the winning / failing determination of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading the game setting value saved in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 20 described later, the high probability mode hit / miss table or the low probability according to the game setting value is read. The mode pass / fail table may be selected one by one to determine the pass / fail.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process shifts to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the winning / failing information is stored in the third hold storage area RE3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. The counter value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out. Of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the hit / fail information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 14 is the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It can be judged by the value of.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command is the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 the first hold command corresponds to the pass / fail information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command (step S1209).

The first hold command set to be turned on in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in step S1301 of the main process of FIG. 16 described later, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. It is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command of. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command, it is not limited to the content described here. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main control unit 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1310 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update process of steps S1311 to S1313 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1310 to the next cycle. To.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transfers output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Executes external output processing to be sent to. For example, in RAM412, commands such as a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are If it is set, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variable type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the game information of the RAM 412 when a prize is generated in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). The number of general winning lots paid out or the number of first winning lots paid out stored in the area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payouts due to the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41 is placed in the second winning opening 315 in a time-saving game state (a state of a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode) or a probability variation game state (a state of a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode). When a winning is generated, the number of balls paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is generated in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 sets the number of variable winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the number of balls paid out by this winning. Is updated to the added value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variable pattern command required for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. Will be done. At this time, the MPU 41 has a jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variation updated in steps S1302 and S1313 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the control process for the jackpot game including the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 316b in the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and as a result, the result of the big hit lottery that triggered the transition to the big hit game (big hit type). ) Is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game 5 times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variation jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the jackpot game control process, the round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open / close execution mode, and the ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 19 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot game state in which the open / close execution mode is executed, the probability variation game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the high. It shifts to a time-saving game state that is a frequency support mode, a normal game state that is not a high-frequency support mode in a low probability mode, and the like.

For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the big hit game state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU41 shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lottery is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variable game.

Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to off, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to on. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag off and the high probability mode flag on when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to off, while the jackpot game flag is set to on.

Further, when shifting the game state to the big hit game state, the MPU 41 sets the big hit game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "big hit number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 executes the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. It will be displayed as a stop. Further, by the display control process, each LED lamp is blinked by the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 only during the predetermined normal symbol fluctuation display time, and the pair of LED lamps are turned on and off depending on whether or not the normal symbol is won. It will be indicated by the lighting pattern which is a combination of. In the case of winning a normal symbol, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second winning opening 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes the game setting value change process. In this game setting value changing process, a process of displaying or hiding the game setting value or controlling the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the setting value changing operation unit 46. To. The details of the game setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process is started when the power is turned on, or between the start-up process and the launch of the game ball. It may be executed in a limited manner. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next power is turned on, so that the game setting value is changed during the business hours of the game hall. Can be prevented.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes the specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio are updated as the specific performance information. The details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1309 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1311: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1311: No), until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is reached, step S1311, step S1312, and step S1313 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1311: Yes).

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1313>
In step S1313, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the variable type counter CS1 and then returns the process to step S1311.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is performed. If it is finished and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to on when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16, and turns off when the jackpot game state shifts to another game state. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set in.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed, the process is shifted to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process shifts to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is set to ON at the start of the variation display in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). The determination is made based on the variation display flag set to off in step S1405 of the variation game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display, and if it determines that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 (step S1403: Yes). Step S1404), the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 has a hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and a hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of holds N and the number of holds M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of holds N and the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process shifts to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variation display based on the hit / miss information, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). , The process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA (step S1502), and shifts from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505-S1507>
Step S1505 shifts to the case where the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts to the case where both or one of the hold number M and the hold number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the hold number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to be turned on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16 is set to on. .. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602 when the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, when the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 holds the hold storage area based on the high-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 7B) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 is held based on the low probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 7 (A)) saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit / miss information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the hit / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table saved according to the game set value in step S1712 in the game set value change process of FIG. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading the game setting value saved in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 20 described later, a high probability mode hit / miss table or a low probability according to the game setting value is read. The pass / fail judgment may be performed by selecting the mode pass / fail table one by one.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 8A). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8B). .. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 8C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the RAM 412 with a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern identified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 has "A01" to "A" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of "A03" is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating that the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 changes any of "D01" to "D08" in which "D" indicating that the lottery results are out of "01" to "08" is added. Set to RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out of front / back", reach other than front / back out, or complete out of line in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 and ends the variation start process. The MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game process of FIG. 17 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is in progress. Further, when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive hits" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the hit / miss result is a big hit. In a certain case, clear the "number of consecutive deviations" to 0 times.

[Game setting value change process]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value changing process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the game setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress, and if the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the game setting value change process is terminated. If the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1701: No), the process shifts to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is determined based on the variation display flag set on in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot game state (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting. When the value change process is completed and the game is not in the jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process is shifted to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703). It is determined whether or not the operation of turning on the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value changing operation unit 46. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value can be changed. Absent. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704 when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is turned on from off. If it is not switched to (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1703: Yes). S1704), the number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). As a result, the current game setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 to on (step S1706), and ends the game setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), and when the set value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No). That is, when the game setting value display unit 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the game setting value change process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value changing operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game set value has been performed. When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709, and when the set value changing operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation. On the contrary, when the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

If the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "4" and the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the game setting value display unit 45 is displayed. When the displayed number is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "1" before rotation, the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left. In this case, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to "4". Further, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "4", the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "1" so as not to rotate further to the right. In some cases, it may not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value in the game setting value of the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the game setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value saved in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally used as a valid game setting value of the RAM 412. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. Then, the game setting value can be determined by turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value changing operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value. It is determined whether or not the operation of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the change operation unit 46. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game setting value change process is terminated. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the game setting value display unit 45 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment display, so that the game setting value is cut off. The number indicating is turned off, and the game setting value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 is set to a low probability mode according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. A winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A) and a high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag to off, and ends the game setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, the low-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 7 (A)) and the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 7 (B)) according to the game set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Is selected. That is, since the winning / failing table of the same game setting value is selected between the low probability mode winning / failing table and the high probability mode winning / failing table, the operation of changing the game setting value is easy. However, the game setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changed. In this case, for example, the game setting value in the low-probability mode is set to "1" and the game setting value in the high-probability mode is set to "4". It becomes possible to set a value.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 41 reads out various numbers of payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further determines the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Read out (step S1802). Here, the number of various payout balls is the number of payout balls required for updating the base information, etc., and is the number of general winning lot payout balls, the first winning lot payout number, the second winning lot payout number, and the variable winning lot payout ball. The number is applicable. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read-out number of general winning opening payout balls, the first winning opening payout number, and the number of out balls, and of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 22 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (the number of balls paid out from the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening) / the number of out balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads out the cumulative jackpot lottery number (cumulative fluctuation display count) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1805). The unit jackpot lottery count is calculated as the symbol variation display count (the number of jackpot lottery received) of the 7-segment display 372 until the number of minus difference balls is 250 in the normal game state. Specifically, the number of unit jackpot lottery = "cumulative jackpot lottery count" / (("out number of balls"-"general winning slot payout number"-"first winning slot payout number") / 250 balls) Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot lottery" is calculated as the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery from the time the game machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read in step S1802 has reached 60,000 balls, and if the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the process is performed in step S1807. If the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process is terminated.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22 (A) and 22 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1807) in the base information, and steps S1803. The current base BL updated in is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of various payout balls and the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1810), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 23 to 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1310 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 or step S1930 of FIG. 26, which will be described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 of FIG. 24 when the BL display flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), and when the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 24 described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1918 of FIG. 25 when the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), and when the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 25, which will be described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 26 when the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), and when the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process shifts to step S1905, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the corresponding End the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 22 (B), the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to on (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 23 (step). S1908), it is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1910 when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S191 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), "8." and "1" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%. , "3", "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22 (B), the previous 60,000 balls "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to on (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and sets the B1 display time counter. End the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process shifts to step S1915, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby indicating the current base BL. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915) and clears the BL display time counter value to 0 (step S1915). S1916), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. 24 (step). S1917), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1919 when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 included in the information two times before (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), "8." and "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before is 32%. , "3", and "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 22 (B), 60,000 balls are used two times before. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a fixed time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922). , The display control process is terminated.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process shifts to step S1924, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step). S1925), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 25 (step). S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1928 when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 22 (B), the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to on (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process shifts to step S1933, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. The alphabets and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933) and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1933). S1934), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 51.

As another embodiment, it is conceivable that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. The description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a 1 msec cycle.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 includes an operation detection process (step S2001), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), a counter update process (step S2003), and a command determination process (step S2004). , The variable game effect processing (step S2005), and the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process (step S2001) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the game machine 10, the operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. Will be judged.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. Further, in step S2102, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. After that, in step S2103, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2101 to S2103, the operation history of the operation button 20 is the operation state of the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals from the first operation detection flag to the third operation detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the previous operation state is stored as the first operation detection flag. ..

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state for the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes the first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of turning on and off the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is continued. Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 has started. Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is completed. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S2201: Yes), and performs the process when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No). The process proceeds to step S2205.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2203 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2202: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No). The process proceeds to step S2208.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2204 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2203: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2203: No). The process proceeds to step S2210.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 continues when the operation pattern of "on", "on", and "on" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. , The first operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 30). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S2205>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2201 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S2205). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2206 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2205: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2205: No). The process proceeds to step S2210.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2206: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2206: No). The process proceeds to step S2210.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "off", "on", and "on" occurs as the operation state for three times of the operation button 20, the operation button 20 changes from the non-operation state to the operation state (operation). Is started), so the second operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 30). Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state by using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2208>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2202 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. (Step S2208). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2210 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2208: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2208: No). The process proceeds to step S2209.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, in the MPU 51, when the operation pattern of "on", "off", and "off" occurs as the operation state for three times of the operation button 20, the operation button 20 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (operation). Is completed), so the third operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 30). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 is completed). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state by using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "off", "off", and "off" occurs as the operation state for three operation buttons 20. (See FIG. 30). The MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 27, in the counter update process (step S2003), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the main symbol to be stopped first based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the character type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type that suggests the game setting value. For example, the character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 114. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the character mode type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The character mode type counter updated here is used to determine the character mode type that suggests the number of unit jackpot lottery. For example, the character aspect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 119. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening basic effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The opening basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening rank suggestion image type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The opening rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number executed together with the basic effect at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 104. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the ending basic effect type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The ending basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the ending of the jackpot game. For example, the ending basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the ending rank suggestion image type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, clears the counter value to 0. The ending rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery executed together with the basic effect at the ending of the jackpot game. For example, the ending rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 74. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the open / close execution mode effect scenario type, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type updated here is used to determine the effect scenario type in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the open / close execution mode effect scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the round game character type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The round game character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type in the round game of the jackpot game. For example, the round game character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 49. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the round game rank suggestion image type counter, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The rank suggestion effect type counter for round games updated here is used to determine the rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery executed together with the round game effect of the jackpot game. For example, the rank suggestion image type counter for round games is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 89.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2004), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 27.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2302. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2301 and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is targeted for processing. For example, in the processing work storage area. It will be remembered.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303 when it is a variable pattern command (step S2302: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2307 when the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2302: No).

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of the main symbol and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 32 (A)), a variation type table (see FIG. 32 (B)), and an effect type table (see FIG. 32 (B)) stored in ROM 511 in advance. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on (see FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to on. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to on. Set the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on when is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the second main symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. The production type table includes a normal reach production pattern table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 33 (A)), a super reach production pattern table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 33 (B)), and a special reach production corresponding to special reach. A pattern table (see FIG. 33C) is included.

Here, FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 32 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is defined. In addition, FIG. 32 (A) is a symbol combination, "777", indicating that the main symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot). Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the doublet other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating that it is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

If the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "7" is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "333" whose stop display result of the main symbol suggests a 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and the main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the 5R probability change promotion effect to be specified.

Furthermore, if the lottery result is "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9". The design is decided. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which indicates the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is stopped and displayed as the stop display result of the main symbol. Can be. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect clearly indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, when the first stop symbol is determined when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display unit 341 is determined in the game round.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". Will be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "out", the outlier type selected based on the outlier type table (FIG. 7 (D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the deviation type is front-back deviation reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than the front-rear deviation, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the symbols before and after the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. When the deviation type is completely out, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 32B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 32 (B), in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30s" and the variation type "normal reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". , The fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "special reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern", and the lottery is performed. The variation pattern command "D05" whose result is "off" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with the variation display time "10s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type table. The effect pattern type table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 33 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 33 (B) is the final individual effect type in the variable game effect. It is a super reach effect pattern table referred to when the effect type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 33 (C) shows a special reach effect referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect. It is a pattern table.

In the present embodiment, a case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but there may be six or more types of effects. Further, in FIG. 33, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type table shown in FIG. 33 (A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is set according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. To do. Here, the effect patterns X1 to the effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type table are, for example, an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed. The final individual production type is a normal reach production.

Further, in the super reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33 (B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, in the effect patterns Y1 to the effect pattern Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the final individual effect type has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect. It is a production that develops into a super reach production with a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super reach effect pattern table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without going through the normal reach effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33 (C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, in the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed, and the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are further executed as the final individual effect types. It is a production that develops into a special reach production with a higher expectation of big hits and a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach effect pattern table may include a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect, without going through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. Good.

Then, the MPU 51 sends a variation pattern command, a variation type table, an effect type table, a stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the effect type counter, and a display variation pattern command indicating the variation type (effect pattern type) to the RAM 512. Set.

<Step S2304>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, in step S2304, the MPU 51 executes a ball ejection performance suggestion image display process for displaying the ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the ball ejection performance on the sub image display unit 38. In the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process, the sub image display unit 38 displays a ball ejection performance suggestion image in a mode in which the character selected according to the game setting value is selected according to the number of unit jackpot lottery when a specific condition is satisfied. To display. The details of the ball ejection performance suggestion processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

<Step S2305>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is subtracted by 1 in the counter update process (step S2003) of FIG. 27, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is in progress, the remaining time of the fluctuation display time, and the like based on the fluctuation display counter. It is possible to judge. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type (effect pattern type), and the content of the ball ejection performance suggestion image to the display control device 6. Then, the command determination process is terminated. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol, the variation type (effect pattern type), and the ball ejection performance suggestion image determined in step S2303. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image and an effect image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variation display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until the preset variation display time elapses, and a plurality of variations are displayed. The fluctuation of the main symbol of is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. .. On the other hand, the sub-image display unit 38 displays a ball ejection performance suggestion image when a specific condition is satisfied.

<Step S2307>
In step S2307, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to on at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2308 when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2307: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2307: No). To step S2310.

<Step S2308>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2308). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process for determining an effect to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

<Step S2309>
In step S2309, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to on. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later. (Step S2601).

<Step S2310>
In step S2310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start each round game and the number of rounds of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, and is a jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Is set in. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2311 when the received command is a round game start command (step S2310: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2310: No). To step S2313.

<Steps S2311 and S2312>
In step S2311, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to on. The round game effect start flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the round game effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2604). Then, the MPU 51 stores the number of rounds of the round game to be started in the RAM 512 as the round number information based on the round number information indicating the number of the round game included in the round game start command (step). S2312).

<Step S2313>
In step S2313, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2314 when the received command is the ending start command (step S2313: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2312: No). Move to S2315.
<Step S2314>
In step S2314, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to on. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51, which will be described later (step S2609).

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is terminated, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2316 when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2315: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2315: No). To step S2317.

<Step S2316>
In step S2316, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to on. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and in the case of determining whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later. (Step S2612).

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game setting value change command. The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. Will be done. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2318 when the received command is a game setting value change command (step S2317: Yes), and when the received command is not a game setting value change command (step S2317: No). , The process proceeds to step S2319.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 51 changes the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command and stores it. The game set value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2404 in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 34, which will be described later, and is referred to for selecting a character type that suggests the game set value.

<Step S2319>
In step S2319, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a unit jackpot lottery count update command. The unit jackpot lottery update command is issued to the first winning opening 314 for a certain number of minus difference balls (for example, minus 250 balls) in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode). It is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery is received) triggered by winning a prize, and is the specific performance information of FIG. It is updated in step S1805 in the update process. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2320 when the received command is the unit jackpot lottery count update command (step S2319: Yes), and when the received command is not the unit jackpot lottery count update command (step S2319: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S2321.

<Step S2320>
In step S2320, the MPU 51 updates the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 to the unit jackpot lottery number included in the unit jackpot lottery count update command. The number of unit jackpot lottery stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2407 in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 34, which will be described later, and the type of character mode suggesting the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery is selected. Referenced for.

<Step S2321>
In step S2321, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing the process based on the other commands received from the main control device 4.

[Image display processing suggesting ball ejection performance]
In the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process executed in step S2304 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, the game setting value suggestion character selected according to the game setting value when a specific condition is satisfied corresponds to the number of unit jackpot lottery. The sub-image display unit 38 is displayed as a ball ejection performance suggestion image in the character mode selected. In the present embodiment, a specific condition for displaying the ball ejection performance display image in the variable game state is that a jackpot lottery (variable game) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times). The specific conditions may be other conditions, and details thereof will be described as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed according to the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery, but instead of one or both of these performance information, other performance information (base information, The ball ejection performance suggestion image may be displayed based on the continuous accessory ratio information, the accessory ratio information, etc.). Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot lottery counter set to 1000 in step S2403 described later (step S2401), and determines whether or not the value of the jackpot lottery counter after the subtraction is 0. Determine (step S2402). That is, in step S2402, it is determined whether or not the number of jackpot lottery has reached 1000 times. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2403 when the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), and when the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2402: No). The process proceeds to step S2411.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the value of the jackpot lottery counter to 1000. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game set value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2404), and selects the character type according to the game set value (step S2405). That is, in the variable game state in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is notified, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed under the specific condition that the number of big hit lottery (variable game number) reaches 1000 times. The specific condition for displaying the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the variable game is not limited to the number of jackpot lottery (number of variable games) reaching 1000, and may be other conditions. For example, the number of jackpot lottery (number of variable games) reaches a predetermined number other than 1000, the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is continuously out of the predetermined number, and the variable game effect It is also conceivable that a specific effect is executed as a specific condition, a lottery for whether or not to display a ball ejection performance suggestion image is performed, and the lottery is won.

Here, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a game setting value suggestion character type that suggests a game setting value. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a game setting value suggestion character selection table for selecting a game setting value suggestion character.

As shown in FIG. 35, the game setting value suggestion character types include a male character (hereinafter “Sam”), a female character A (hereinafter “Marine”), a female character B (hereinafter “Warlin”), and a female character C (hereinafter “Warlin”). "Urin"), marine life character A (hereinafter "jugon") and marine life character B (hereinafter "shark") are included. "Sam" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4. "Marine" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3. "Warlin" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 2. "Urin" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. "Dugong" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4). The "shark" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3). This point is also clear from the game setting value suggestion character selection table shown in FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, in the game setting value suggestion character selection table, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is most likely to be selected, then "Dugong" is most likely to be selected, and these characters. Other characters are harder to select than. When the game setting value is 3, "Marine" is most likely to be selected, then "Shark" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 2, "warin" is most likely to be selected, then "dugong" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 1, "urin" is most likely to be selected, then "shark" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters.

In this way, "Sam" is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" is selected when the game setting value is 3. It is a character that is easy to be played and suggests that the game setting value is 3, and "Warlin" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 2 and suggests that the game setting value is 2. "Urin" is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 1, and suggests that the game setting value is 1. Further, "dugong" is easier to select when the game setting value is 2 or 4, than when the game setting value is 1 or 3, and suggests that the game setting value is 2 or 4 (even number). It is a character. Further, "shark" is easier to be selected when the game setting value is 1 or 3, as compared with the case where the game setting value is 2 or 4, and suggests that the game setting value is 1 or 3 (odd number). It is a character.

<Step S2406>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected game setting value suggestion character is a “dugong” or a “shark” (step S2406). That is, it is determined whether or not the selected game setting value suggestion characters are male characters and female characters A to C. When the game setting value suggestion character is "dugong" or "shark" (step S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2409, and when the game setting value suggestion character is not "dugong" or "shark" (step S2406: No), the process proceeds to step S2407.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the game setting value suggestion character is not "dugong" or "shark" (step S2406: No), the MPU 51 acquires the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 (step S2407), and the unit jackpot lottery count (rank). ), The mode type of the game setting value suggestion character is selected (step S2408). That is, when the game setting value suggestion character is other than "dugong" and "shark", the unit jackpot lottery number (rank) is suggested depending on the mode of the game setting value suggestion character. Even when the game setting value suggestion characters are "dugong" and "shark", the unit jackpot lottery number (rank) may be suggested depending on the mode of the game setting value suggestion character.

Here, FIGS. 37 and 38 are diagrams showing an example of a character mode selection table for selecting a mode of a game setting value suggestion character. The character mode selection table is defined for each rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, if the number of unit jackpot lottery is 25 or more, "Rank S", if the number of unit jackpot lottery is 20 or more and less than 25, "Rank A", and the number of unit jackpot lottery is 15 or more and 20 times. If it is less than, it is classified as "Rank B", if the number of unit jackpot lottery is 10 or more and less than 15 times, it is classified as "Rank C", or if the number of unit jackpot lottery is less than 10, it is classified as "Rank D". A character mode selection table is defined for each rank.

Further, in each character mode selection table, the character mode is defined for each game setting value suggestion character, and the mode suggesting the rank differs depending on the game setting value suggestion character type. For example, in the case of "Sam", the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery is suggested according to the body shape. Specifically, being a super macho body is "rank S", being a macho body (see FIG. 35) is "rank A", and being a fine macho body is "rank B". It is suggested that it is "Rank B" because it has a gully body shape, and that it is "Rank C" because it has a gully body shape (see FIG. 39 (A)).

Also, in the case of "Marine", the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery is suggested depending on the costume. Specifically, the costume is "Rank S" because it is a kimono, it is "Rank A" because it is Santa, and it is "Rank B" because it is a happi coat. The fact that the costume is a bikini (see FIG. 35) suggests that it is "Rank B", and that the costume is a tank top suggests that it is "Rank C".

In the case of "warin" and "urin", the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery is suggested by the posture and pose. In the case of "warin", it is suggested that the ranks are higher in the order of wink, whistling, triangular sitting (see FIG. 35), upright posture and down posture. In the case of "Urin", it is suggested that the rank is higher in the order of V sign, guts pose, OK sign (see FIG. 35), good sign and bye-bye.

As shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S" (the number of unit jackpot lottery is 25 or more), the super macho body shape is most likely to be selected in "Sam", while other body shapes are selected. It is difficult to select, in "Marine" it is the easiest to select a kimono costume while other costumes are difficult to select, in "Warlin" it is the easiest to select a wink but it is difficult to select another posture or pose, "Urin" ", While the V sign is the easiest to select, it is difficult to select other poses. In other words, "Sam" has a super macho body shape, "Marine" has a kimono costume, "Warin" has a wink, and "Urin" has a V sign. , Suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S".

As shown in FIG. 37 (B), when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank A" (the number of unit jackpot lottery is 20 or more and less than 25), the macho body shape is most easily selected in "Sam", while other It is difficult to select the body shape, Santa's costume is most likely to be selected in "Marine" while other costumes are difficult to select, and whistling is most easily selected in "Warlin" but other postures and poses are difficult to select. , "Urin" is the easiest to select the guts pose, but it is difficult to select other poses. In other words, "Sam" has a macho figure, "Marine" has a Santa costume, "Warlin" has a whistling pose, and "Urin" has a guts pose. Therefore, it is suggested that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank A".

As shown in FIG. 37 (C), when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B" (the number of unit jackpot lottery is 15 or more and less than 20), the fine macho body shape is most easily selected in "Sam", but other It is difficult to select the body shape of, while in "Marine" the happi costume is the easiest to select while other costumes are difficult to select, and in "Warlin" the triangular sitting is the easiest to select while other postures and poses are selected. It is difficult to select the OK sign in "Urin", but it is difficult to select other poses. In other words, "Sam" has a fine macho body shape, "Marine" has a happi coat, "Warin" has a triangular sitting, and "Urin" has an OK sign pose. This suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B".

As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank C" (the number of unit jackpot lottery is 10 or more and less than 15), the gully body shape is most easily selected in "Sam", while other It is difficult to select the body shape, bikini costume is most likely to be selected in "Marine" while other costumes are difficult to select, and upright posture is most easily selected in "Warlin" but other postures and poses are difficult to select. , "Urin" is the easiest to select a good sign, but it is difficult to select another pose. In other words, "Sam" has a gully body shape, "Marine" has a bikini costume, "Warlin" has an upright posture, and "Urin" has a good sign. It suggests that the number of jackpot lottery is "Rank C".

As shown in FIG. 38 (B), when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank D" (the number of unit jackpot lottery is less than 10), the crunchy body shape is most easily selected in "Sam", while other body shapes are selected. It is difficult to select the tank top costume in "Marine" while it is difficult to select other costumes, and in "Warlin" it is most easy to select the down posture but it is difficult to select other postures and poses. In "Urin", bye-bye is the easiest to select, but other poses are difficult to select. In other words, "Sam" has a crunchy body shape, "Marine" has a tank top costume, "Warin" has a down posture, and "Urin" has a bye-bye pose. This suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank D".

<Steps S2409 and S2410>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 causes the sub-image display unit 38 to display the ball ejection performance suggestion image (step S2409). Specifically, when the game setting value suggestion character selected in step S2405 is other than "dugong" or "shark" (step S2406: No), the game selected in step S2405 as a ball ejection performance suggestion image. The set value suggestion character is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in the mode selected in step S2408. On the other hand, when the game setting value suggestion character selected in step S2405 is "dugong" or "shark" (step S2406: Yes), "dugong" or "jugon" or "Jugong" or "Jugong" or "Jugong" or ""Shark" is displayed on the sub image display unit 38. Then, the MPU 51 sets the suggestion image display flag indicating that the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 to on (step S2410), and ends the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process. ..

Here, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a ball ejection performance suggestion image in a variable game. In the ball ejection performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39 (A), a “sam” having a crunchy body shape is displayed, suggesting that the game setting value is 4 and the number of unit jackpot lottery is “rank D”. Further, in the ball ejection performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39 (B), the pose of the OK sign "Urin" is displayed, suggesting that the game setting value is 1 and the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank C". Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the ball ejection performance can be displayed in the variable game, so that the player can confirm the ball ejection performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38. It is possible to concentrate on the game, and it is possible to estimate and enjoy the ball ejection performance from the ball ejection performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed as suggesting the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lottery. Here, the game set value defines the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit (big hit probability). Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on the jackpot probability, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball ejection performance of the game machine. In addition, the number of unit jackpots is the first prize until the number of difference balls reaches the minus of the predetermined number of balls (for example, minus 250 balls) or the number of shot balls of the game ball (the number of out balls) reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth 314. That is, the number of unit jackpot lottery is an index showing the ease of receiving the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode), and the game ball required for the result of the jackpot lottery to become a jackpot. Affects the number (the difference in the normal game state). Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on a plurality of performance information including the number of unit jackpot lottery, it is possible to evaluate by reflecting the difference ball in the normal game state, so that the ball ejection performance of the game machine can be improved. It becomes possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on a more appropriately reflected index.

Instead of one or both of the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lottery, the ball ejection performance may be suggested based on the base, the continuous bonus ratio, or the bonus ratio.

Here, the base is the refund rate (ball output rate) in the normal gaming state (the state of the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode) as described above, that is, with respect to the "number of out balls" in the normal gaming state. It is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to the "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning lot" and the "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning lot". Therefore, by suggesting the ball ejection performance based on the base, it affects the number of game balls (difference balls in the normal game state) required for the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the normal game state to become a big hit. .. Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on a plurality of performance information including the base, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on an index in which the ball ejection performance of the game machine 10 is more appropriately reflected. Become.

In addition, the continuous bonus ratio is the total of winnings to all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out as described above. This is the ratio of the number of balls to be paid out to the variable winning lots to the number of balls to be paid out. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (residence ratio in the jackpot game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 (ball output rate in the jackpot game state). It is an index showing. Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on a plurality of performance information including the continuous bonus ratio, the ball ejection performance in the jackpot game state is reflected, so that the ball ejection performance can be suggested more appropriately. It will be possible.

In addition, the bonus ratio is the total payout by winning to all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out as described above. In terms of the number of balls, it is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out to the number of balls paid out from the second winning unit and the number of balls paid out from the variable winning unit. In other words, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (stay ratio in the jackpot game state), the stay ratio in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the variable winning opening 316 and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the second winning opening 315 (the ball output rate in the jackpot game state). Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on a plurality of performance information including the accessory ratio, the ball ejection performance in the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state is reflected, so that the ball ejection performance is suggested more appropriately. It becomes possible to do.

Furthermore, in addition to or in place of the above-mentioned ball ejection performance (game set value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio or bonus ratio), or in place of one of these ball ejection performances, the ball ejection performance The expected value of the ball may be suggested. Here, the expected ball output value is, for example, the expected number of balls to be ejected (paid out game balls) with respect to the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number). The expected payout value is 100% when the total number of fired game balls (total number of out balls) and the expected number of payout balls (payout game balls) are the same, and the expected number of balls to be paid out (payout game). It is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and less than 100% when the expected number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) is smaller. That is, when the expected value of ball ejection exceeds 100%, it is advantageous for the player, and the higher the value, the higher the ball ejection performance. On the other hand, when the expected value of ball ejection is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the value, the lower the ball ejection performance.

In addition, the expected number of balls to be paid out (number of payout game balls) is a normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), a short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a probabilistic game state (high probability mode). It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of the probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the jackpot game state, and the theoretical number of balls to be played in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each game state is, for example, a game setting value (big hit probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B))), a distribution rate of each big hit type ( (See FIG. 7 (C)), calculated based on the number of unit jackpot lottery, bonus ratio, and the like. In addition, the number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) other than the normal game state (short-time game state, probabilistic game state, and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive villas for the first hit and the distribution rate of the jackpot type (Fig.). 7 (C)), calculated based on the theoretical difference number of balls for each jackpot type, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, and the like.

In addition, the expected ball output value may be evaluated as a sufficiency rate with respect to the borderline. Here, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery required for the ball rental per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected ball output value to 100%, and this borderline is the jackpot lottery probability. The calculation is performed on the assumption that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit. That is, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the difference is ± 0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. In addition, various methods for calculating the borderline have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls lent for 1000 yen / (the average number of balls to be played in the jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls rented per 1000 yen is generally 250 balls. In addition, the average number of balls to be played in the jackpot game is the number of balls to be played per jackpot game when the number of round games in the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. The total probability is the average jackpot winning probability when the high probability mode and the low probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical value. Then, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is calculated as the ratio between the number of unit jackpot lottery and the borderline. When the sufficiency rate of this borderline exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous to the player, and when it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the number of unit jackpot lottery is 18 and the borderline is 20, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on the expected ball ejection value (including the border line), the ball ejection performance can be evaluated in consideration of the state of the nail and the surface texture of the game board 31, so that the ball ejection performance can be evaluated. It becomes possible to suggest more appropriately.

Further, when suggesting a ball ejection performance of 3 or more out of a plurality of ball ejection performances, it is preferable to suggest the ball ejection performance by combining indexes having different properties. For example, the game setting value related to the jackpot probability, the number of unit jackpot lottery (or base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio) related to each winning opening 313 to 316, and the expected payout regarding the jackpot probability and each winning slot 313 to 316. It is preferable to suggest the ball ejection performance in combination with the value. For example, when the game setting value is suggested by the character and the number of jackpot lottery is simply suggested by the character aspect as in the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance may be suggested by the character aspect as well as the expected ball ejection value. preferable. That is, when suggesting a ball ejection performance of 3 or more, suggesting a ball ejection performance of 3 or more by one character (suggestion target) rather than individually suggesting a ball ejection performance of 3 or more by a plurality of characters or the like. Is preferable.

<Step S2411>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, when the value of the jackpot lottery counter is not 0 (step S2402: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggestion image display flag set to be on in step S2410 is set to on. (Step S2411). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2412 when the suggestion image display flag is set to on (step S2411: Yes), and when the suggestion image display flag is set to off (step S2411: No). , The ball ejection performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
When the suggestion image display flag is set to on (step S2411: Yes), the MPU 51 hides the ball ejection performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38 (step S2412), and the suggestion image. The display flag is set to off (step S2413), and the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process executed when the variation pattern command is received, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is subsed from the start of the variable game every time the number of variable games reaches 1000. An example has been described in which the image is displayed on the image display unit 38 and the ball ejection performance suggestion image is not displayed when the next variable game is started. That is, the sub-image display unit 38 is used as an image display unit for displaying a ball ejection performance suggestion image. Therefore, while the symbol display unit 341 executes a variable game effect for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery, the sub image display unit 38 displays the ball ejection performance suggestion image, so that the player can eject the ball. It is possible to prevent the suggestion image from being mistaken as a production that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of variable games reaches 1000, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is continuously displayed on the sub image display unit 38 at least from the start to the end of the variable game. Although the case has been described, it is not always necessary to continuously display the variable game from the start to the end. For example, when a super reach effect pattern or a special reach effect pattern is selected as the effect pattern, while the basic effect (non-reach effect) from the start of fluctuation to the development of normal reach effect is being executed (from the start of fluctuation). The ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 only during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the development of the super reach effect (from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the normal reach effect). It may be displayed. In this case, while the super reach effect or the special reach effect is being executed, the sub-image display unit 38 can execute the variable game effect together with the symbol display unit 341. When the sub-image display unit 38 executes the variable game effect during the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the image of the variable game effect may be displayed as the upper layer of the ball ejection performance suggestion image, or the ball ejection effect may be displayed. After hiding the performance suggestion image, the image of the variable game effect may be displayed. Further, in the variable game in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38, when an effect pattern in which a highly expected effect is executed is selected on the sub image display unit 38, the sub image is displayed. The display of the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the unit 38 may be carried over to the next and subsequent variable games of the variable game and executed.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
In the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2308 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game are determined. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2501, the MPU 51 executes an opening effect determining process that determines an opening effect executed between the start of the jackpot game and the start of the open / close execution mode. In the opening effect determination process, a rank suggestion image suggesting the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number can be determined together with the opening basic effect indicating that the jackpot game is started.

The opening basic effect is determined according to the value of the opening (OP) basic effect type counter based on the opening basic effect selection table defined for each game setting value. In the opening basic effect, the game setting value suggestion character can be displayed as in the case of displaying the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the variable game effect. The game setting value suggestion character type and the game setting value suggested by each game setting value suggestion character are the same as those of the game setting value suggestion character in the variable game effect. However, in the present embodiment, the game setting value suggestion character type includes "dugong" which suggests that the game setting value is even, and "shark" which suggests that the game setting value is odd. However, the game setting value suggestion character type is "Sam" which suggests that the game setting value is 4, "Marine" which suggests that the game setting value is 3, and suggests that the game setting value is 2. There are four types, "warin" and "urin", which suggests that the game setting value is 1.

Here, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an opening basic effect selection table referred to in the opening effect determination process.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is most likely to be selected as the opening basic effect regardless of which of the game setting values 1 to 4. Here, "no suggestion" is different from the effect in which the four types of game setting value suggestion characters that suggest the game setting value are displayed (the effect in which the game setting value suggestion character is not displayed) as the opening basic effect. Means to be executed. That is, in the variable game state, the ball ejection performance suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the number of unit jackpot lottery reaches 1000 times, but in the opening of the jackpot game, the lottery based on the opening basic effect selection table is won. The ball ejection performance suggestion effect is executed under a specific condition. Then, in the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is set so as to be most easily selected, so that the game set value is not easily recognized by the player in the jackpot game. As a result, when the game set value is a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from moving to another game machine 10 in a short time. Then, the higher the game setting value is favorable to the player (the higher the jackpot winning probability), the easier it is to select "no suggestion". That is, the higher the game setting value, the more difficult it is for the game setting value suggestion character to be displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game set value is a high set value, and makes it possible for the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

As the opening basic effect selection table, a table without "no suggestion" may be adopted so that the performance information display image is always displayed in the opening effect, and "no suggestion" is set for each game setting value. You may adopt a table having the same probability that "" is selected.

Further, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and it is more difficult to select other characters than "Sam". When the game setting value is 3, "Suggest" is selected. "Marine" is more likely to be selected next to "None", other characters are less likely to be selected than "Marine", and when the game setting value is 2, "Warlin" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", Other characters are less likely to be selected than "Warlin", and when the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Urin".

As described above, regarding the game setting value suggestion character, "Sam" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and suggests that the game setting value is 4. Further, since "Sam" is not sorted (not selected) at the game setting value 1, the game setting value 1 is denied when "Sam" is displayed in the opening effect, and the game setting value 2 or more is confirmed. .. In that sense, "Sam" in the opening effect is a character whose game setting value is determined to be 2 or more.

In addition, "Marine" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 3, suggesting that the game setting value is 3, and "Warlin" is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 2. It is a character that suggests that the set value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game set value is 1, and suggests that the game set value is 1. The higher the game setting value, the lower the probability that the game setting value suggestion character suggesting that the game setting value is selected is selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 10/100, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 15/100. When the set value is 2, the selection rate of "warin" is 20/100, and when the game setting value is 1, the selection rate of "urin" is 25/100. As described above, when the game setting value is a high setting value, it is difficult to display a character suggesting that the game setting value is a high setting value in the opening effect. As a result, even if a character suggesting that the game setting value is the low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is the high setting value in the opening effect, the game setting value is immediately set to the low setting value. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

As the opening basic effect selection table, a table in which the probability that the game setting value suggestion character suggesting that the game setting value is selected is the same for each game setting value may be adopted.

On the other hand, the rank suggestion image is determined according to the value of the rank suggestion image type counter based on the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery count. Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a rank suggestion image type, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of an opening unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table.

As shown in FIG. 42, the rank suggestion image includes an image of a whale of a plurality of aspects (hereinafter referred to as “whale lucky”). Specifically, there are six types of rank suggestion images: "Shou Whale Lucky", "GOLD Whale Lucky", "GOO Whale Lucky", "Normal Whale Lucky", "BAD Whale Lucky" and "BLACK Whale Lucky". Includes images. "Shou Whale Lucky" is an image that clearly shows that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S" (25 times or more). "GOLD lottery" is an image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank S". "GOO lottery" is an image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank A" (20 times or more and less than 25 times). "Normal whale lucky" is an image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B" (15 times or more and less than 20 times). "BAD lottery lucky" is an image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank C" (10 times or more and less than 15 times). "BLACK lottery" is an image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank D" (less than 10 times).

As shown in FIG. 43, in the opening unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, rank suggestion images are defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery count according to the opening rank suggestion image type counter. In this unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S", "GOLD whale lucky" is most likely to be selected, and whale lucky of other aspects is hard to be selected. When the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank A", "GOO lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are difficult to be selected. When the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B", "normal lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are difficult to be selected. When the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank C", "BAD lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are difficult to be selected. When the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank D", "BKACK lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are difficult to be selected. In addition, "Shou Whale Lucky" is distributed only when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S".

As described above, "Shou Whale Lucky" is selected only when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S", and is a rank suggestion image clearly indicating that it is "Rank S". "GOLD lottery lucky" is easy to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank S", and is a rank suggestion image suggesting that it is "rank S". "GOO lottery lucky" is easily selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank A", and is a rank suggestion image suggesting that it is "rank A". "Normal whale lucky" is easy to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank B", and is a rank suggestion image suggesting that it is "rank B". "BAD lottery lucky" is easily selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank C", and is a rank suggestion image suggesting that it is "rank C". "BLACK lottery lucky" is easy to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank D", and is a rank suggestion image suggesting that it is "rank D".

Here, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of an opening screen in the jackpot game. On the opening screen shown in FIG. 44 (A), it is suggested that the game setting value is 4 by displaying "Sam" as the game setting value suggestion character as the opening basic effect, and "Shou Whale Lucky" as the rank suggestion image. Is displayed, it is confirmed that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S". Further, on the opening screen shown in FIG. 44B, it is suggested that the game setting value is 2 by displaying "warin" as the game setting value suggestion character as the opening basic effect, and "BLACK" as the rank suggestion image. The display of "Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank D".

<Step S2502>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2502, the MPU 51 executes an ending effect determining process for determining the ending effect executed between the end of the open / close execution mode and the end of the jackpot game. In the ending effect determination process, a rank suggestion image suggesting the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery is determined together with the ending basic effect indicating that the jackpot game is completed. The rank suggestion image determination process in the ending effect is executed in the same manner as the opening effect determination process in step S2502 described above.

Here, FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ending basic effect selection table used in the ending effect determination process, and FIG. 45 (B) is an example of an image selection table suggesting the number of unit jackpot lottery for the ending effect. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 45 (A), in the variable game state, the ball ejection performance suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the number of unit jackpot lottery reaches 1000 times, but in the ending effect determination process, the jackpot game Similar to the opening, the ball ejection performance suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the lottery based on the ending basic effect selection table is won. Then, in the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is most likely to be selected as the ending basic effect regardless of whether the game setting value is 1 to 4. Here, "no suggestion" is a different effect from the effect in which the four types of game setting value suggestion characters that suggest the game setting value are displayed (the effect that the game setting value suggestion character is not displayed), as in the opening basic effect. ) Is executed. Since "no suggestion" is most easily selected in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the game set value in the jackpot game. As a result, when the game set value is a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from moving to another game machine 10 in a short time. Then, the higher the game setting value is favorable to the player (the higher the jackpot winning probability), the easier it is to select "no suggestion". That is, the higher the game setting value, the more difficult it is for the game setting value suggestion character to be displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game set value is a high set value, and makes it possible for the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

As the ending basic effect selection table, a table without "no suggestion" may be adopted so that the performance information display image is always displayed in the ending effect, and "no suggestion" is set for each game setting value. You may adopt a table having the same probability that "" is selected.

Further, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and it is more difficult to select other characters than "Sam". When the game setting value is 3, "Suggest" is selected. "Marine" is more likely to be selected next to "None", other characters are less likely to be selected than "Marine", and when the game setting value is 2, "Warlin" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", Other characters are less likely to be selected than "Warlin", and when the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Urin". In addition, there is a distribution of "everyone" only when the game setting value is 4. When this "all" is selected, all of the game setting value suggestion characters are displayed on the ending screen.

As described above, regarding the game setting value suggestion character, "Sam" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and suggests that the game setting value is 4. Further, since "Sam" is not sorted (not selected) at the game setting value 1, the game setting value 1 is denied when "Sam" is displayed in the ending effect, and the game setting value 2 or more is confirmed. .. In that sense, "Sam" in the ending effect is a character whose game setting value is determined to be 2 or more.

In addition, "Marine" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 3, suggesting that the game setting value is 3, and "Warlin" is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 2. It is a character that suggests that the set value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game set value is 1, and suggests that the game set value is 1. The higher the game setting value, the lower the probability that the game setting value suggestion character suggesting that the game setting value is selected is selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 15/110, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 20/110. The selection rate of "warin" when the set value is 2 is 25/110, and the selection rate of "urin" when the game set value is 1 is 30/110. As described above, when the game setting value is a high setting value, it is difficult for the character suggesting that the game setting value is a high setting value to be displayed in the ending effect. As a result, even if a character suggesting that the game setting value is the low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is the high setting value in the ending effect, the game setting value is immediately set to the low setting value. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to proceed with the game while maintaining the expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

As the ending basic effect selection table, a table in which the probability that the game setting value suggestion character suggesting the game setting value is selected is the same for each game setting value may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (B), in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, rank suggestion images are defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery count according to the ending rank suggestion image type counter. .. In this unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, "GOLD whale lucky" is most likely to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank S", and "GOO" when the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank A". "BAD lottery" is the easiest to select, "normal whale lucky" is most likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank B", and "BAD whale lucky" is the easiest to select when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank C". Is the easiest to select, and when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank D", "BKACK lottery lucky" is the easiest to select. In addition, "Shou Whale Lucky" is distributed only when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S".

In this way, in the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table for the ending production, the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank S" for "Shou Whale Lucky" as in the opening production unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table. "GOLD lottery" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank S", and "GOO lottery" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank A", and "normal" "Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B", "BAD Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank C", and "BLACK Whale Lucky" is a unit jackpot. It is a rank suggestion image suggesting that the number of lottery is "rank D".

Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in the jackpot game. On the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (A), it is clearly shown that the game setting value is 4 by displaying "everyone" as the game setting value suggestion character as the ending basic effect, and "normal lottery lucky" as the rank suggestion image. Is displayed, which suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B". On the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), it is suggested that the game setting value is 3 by displaying "Marine" as the game setting value suggestion character as the ending basic effect, and "GOO lottery lucky" as the rank suggestion image. Is displayed, which suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank A".

<Step S2503>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2503, the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario executed in the opening / closing execution mode. The open / close execution mode effect scenario defines a combination of round game effects executed in each round game in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the effect scenario is determined based on the open / close execution mode effect scenario table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) described later. Further, the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario includes an effect scenario in which the performance information display image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a predetermined round game. Then, when the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined as the opening / closing execution mode production scenario, the round game character selection table described later (FIG. 49 (FIG. 49) Based on (see A)) and the round game unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table (see FIG. 49 (B)), the ball ejection performance suggestion image to be displayed in the relevant round is determined.

Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 are diagrams showing an example of an open / close execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the open / close execution mode effect determination process. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A) is a 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. (B) is a 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot. FIG. 48 is a 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is an effect scenario executed in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. To specify. In this 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode production scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 0 to 4, the effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in one round, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 5 to 9, the ball is ejected in two rounds. The production scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 10 to 14, the production scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 3 rounds, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 15. In ~ 19, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 4 rounds, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 20 to 24, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined. .. When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 25 to 79, the effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by the lottery has a round game in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. Will be done. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, it is determined by lottery whether or not the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is an effect scenario executed in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot. To specify. In this 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode production scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 0 to 4 or 25 to 29, the effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and the value of the effect scenario type counter is 5 to 9 or 30. In ~ 34, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 2 rounds is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 10 to 14 or 35 to 39, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 3 rounds. Is determined, and when the value of the effect scenario type counter is 15 to 19 or 40 to 44, the effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined, and the value of the effect scenario type counter is 20 to 24 or 45 to. In 49, a production scenario in which a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined. When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 50 to 79, the effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. That is, in the open / close execution mode of the 5R probability variation jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by the lottery has a round game in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. Will be done. That is, in the open / close execution mode of the 5R probability variation jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed by lottery.

As can be seen by comparing FIG. 47 (A) and FIG. 47 (B), in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the probability that the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is higher than that in the 5R normal jackpot. As a result, in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, it becomes possible for a player who does not pay attention to the round game production to pay attention to the round game production because of the relief of being a probability variation jackpot. In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, the probability that the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed may be lower than that of the 5R probability variation jackpot, or the probability may be the same as that of the 5R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 48, the 16R probability variable jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table defines an effect scenario executed in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. In this 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode production scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the production scenario type counter is 0 to 4, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in one round, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 5 to 9, the ball is ejected in two rounds. The production scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 10 to 14, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 3 rounds, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 15. In ~ 19, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 4 rounds, and in the production scenario type counter values 20 to 24, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined. When the value of the production scenario type counter is 25 to 29, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 6 rounds. When the production scenario type counter value is 30 to 34, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 7 rounds. The production scenario to be performed is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 35 to 39, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 8 rounds, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 40 to 44, 9 rounds are determined. When the value of the production scenario type counter is 45 to 49, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 10 rounds, and the production scenario type counter is determined. When the value is 50 to 54, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 11 rounds is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 55 to 59, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 12 rounds is determined. When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 60 to 64, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 13 rounds. The effect scenario is determined, and when the effect scenario type counter value is 65 to 69, the ball ejection performance suggestion is performed in 14 rounds. The production scenario in which the image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 70 to 74, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 15 rounds, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 75 to 79. Then, the production scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in 16 rounds is determined.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot opening / closing execution mode production scenario selection table, a ball ejection performance suggestion image is always displayed in any of the round games of 1R to 16R. As a result, it becomes possible for a player who does not pay attention to the round game production to pay attention to the round game production because of the relief of being a probabilistic jackpot. In the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, as in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, an effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is not displayed may be determined.

Here, FIG. 49A is a diagram showing an example of a round game character selection table used when an effect scenario in which a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is selected in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process. 49 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round game production unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used when a production scenario in which a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is selected in the opening / closing execution mode production determination process. is there.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the round game character selection table, "Sam" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 3. When the game setting value is 2, "warin" is most likely to be selected, and when the game setting value is 1, "urin" is most easily selected. In this way, in the round game production, as in the opening effect and the ending effect, "Sam" suggests that the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" suggests that the game setting value is 3. , "Warlin" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 2, and "Urin" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 1.

As shown in FIG. 49 (B), in the round game production unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, rank suggestion images are defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery count according to the round game rank suggestion image type counter. ing. In this unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, "GOLD whale lucky" is most likely to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank S", and "GOO" when the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank A". "BAD lottery" is the easiest to select, "normal whale lucky" is most likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank B", and "BAD whale lucky" is the easiest to select when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank C". Is the easiest to select, and "BKACK lottery lucky" is the easiest to select. In addition, "Shou Whale Lucky" is distributed only when the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S".

In this way, in the round game production unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, as in the opening production unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table and the ending production unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, "Shou Whale Lucky" Clarifies that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S", and "GOO Whale Lucky" has the number of unit jackpot lottery Suggesting that it is "Rank A", "Normal Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank B", and "BAD Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank C". "BLACK lottery lucky" is a rank suggestion image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank D".

Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a round game screen in a jackpot game. On the round game screen shown in FIG. 50 (A), a scenario in which a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the fifth round round game is selected as the opening / closing execution mode production scenario, and "Marine" is selected as the game setting value suggestion character. The display suggests that the game setting value is 3, and the display of "GOLD whale lucky" as the rank suggestion image suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "rank S". Further, on the round game screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), a scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the second round round game is selected as the open / close execution mode effect scenario, and the game setting value suggestion character is "Sam". Is displayed, it is suggested that the game setting value is 4, and by displaying "Shou Whale Lucky" as a rank suggestion image, it is clearly shown that the number of unit jackpot lottery is "Rank S". There is.

<Step S2504>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2504, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503 in the RAM 512. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the ending basic effect type determined in step S2502, and the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503 in the RAM 512, and is required. The ball ejection performance suggestion image type to be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the opening, opening / closing execution mode, or ending is stored according to the above. As a result, in the jackpot game, the speaker 26 executes the audio output effect, and the illumination unit 27 executes the lamp effect.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 transmits a jackpot game effect command indicating the content of the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503 to the display control device 6. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes an opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the content of the ball ejection performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect as needed, and an ending basic effect type determined in step S2502. Depending on the content and number of execution rounds of the ball ejection performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503, and the ball ejection performance suggestion image executed in the opening effect as needed. The content is transmitted to the display control device 6. As a result, in the jackpot game, the symbol display unit 341 executes an image effect including a ball ejection performance suggestion image.

In the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the ball ejection performance can be displayed in the jackpot game, so that the player can confirm the ball ejection performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38. It is possible to concentrate on the jackpot game, and it is possible to estimate and enjoy the ball ejection performance from the ball ejection performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the jackpot game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image can be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in any of the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending. Therefore, it is possible to focus on the jackpot game production from the start to the end of the jackpot game. In this way, by making the player pay attention to the jackpot game production, it becomes possible to convey to the player the goodness of the jackpot game production with respect to the jackpot game production that is easily neglected by the player.

In the jackpot game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image can be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in any of the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending, but only in any one of the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending. The ball performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub image display unit 38.

In addition, when suggesting the ball ejection performance in the jackpot game, as in the case of the variable game, instead of one or both of the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number, the base, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, The ball ejection performance may be suggested based on the expected ball ejection value and the borderline sufficiency rate. That is, the ball ejection performance suggested in the jackpot game is not limited to the combination of the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lottery.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 27, in the variable game effect processing (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when the variable pattern command is received, the command determination process of FIG. 31 is performed. The variable game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2303 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc., and the ball ejection performance suggestion image determined in step S2304 is displayed on the sub image display unit 38. Will be executed.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing, the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40 are executed. Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to be on in step S2309 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on, and the jackpot game effect When the start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the process proceeds to step S2604.

<Steps S2602 and S2603>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2602), executes the opening effect start process (step S2603), and executes the jackpot game effect start process (step S2603). The production process ends. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2501 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40, and also serves as an opening effect for the display control device 6. The opening effect start command for starting the image effect of the above to the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the opening basic effect, and when it is determined that the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Will be done.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to be on in step S2311 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on, and when the round game effect start flag is on. (Step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2605, and when the open / close execution mode start flag is off (step S2604: No), the process proceeds to step S2607.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
When the round game effect start flag is on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to off (step S2605), executes the round game effect start process (step S2606), and hits the jackpot. End the game production process. In the round game effect start process, the MPU 51 executes the round game effect in the corresponding round in the open / close execution mode effect scenario determined in step S2503 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40 in the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. At the same time, a round game start command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to start an image effect as a round game effect in the corresponding round is transmitted to the display control device 6. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the opening basic effect, and when it is determined that the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Will be done.

<Step S2607>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to be on in step S2314 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on, and when the ending start flag is on (step S2607: Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S2608, and when the ending start flag is off (step S2607: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the ending start flag is on (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S2608), executes the ending effect start process (step S2609), and ends the jackpot game effect process. To do. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2502 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40, and also serves as an ending effect for the display control device 6. The ending effect start command for starting the image effect of the above to the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the ending basic effect, and when it is determined that the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Will be done.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to be on in step S2316 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is on ( Step S2610: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2611, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2610: No), the jackpot game effect process ends.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2611), executes the ending effect end process (step S2612), and executes the jackpot game effect end process (step S2612). The production process ends.

By the way, a player selects a game machine based on an individual reason and plays a game on the game machine. Then, one of the criteria when the player selects the game machine is the ball ejection performance of the game machine. This ball ejection performance is affected by the ease of winning a prize in the first starting winning opening and the general winning opening, that is, the frequency with which a big hit lottery can be received and the ball ejection rate. On the other hand, the ease of winning a prize in the first starting winning opening or the general winning opening is affected by the physical state of the game machine, for example, the state of the nails placed on the game board, the surface texture of the game board, and the like. .. Here, the nails placed on the game board have individual differences between the game machines at the shipping stage. In addition, the state of the nail changes over time, and there are individual differences in the degree of this secular change between game machines. In addition, regarding the surface texture of the game board, there are individual differences in the shipping stage and aging of the game machines. Therefore, even among the same type of gaming machines manufactured at the same time and installed in the same hall at the same time, the ease of winning the first start winning opening and the general winning opening is different. Since the physical state of such a game machine can be confirmed from the outside, the player confirms the ball ejection performance by confirming the physical state of the game machine, and it is presumed that the ball ejection performance is high. It is possible to select and play the game.

On the other hand, as a game machine, there is a game machine in which the game hall side can set the jackpot probability from a plurality of stages of jackpot probabilities (game set values). In such a game machine, even if the ball ejection performance based on the ease of winning the first start winning opening or the general winning opening is low, if the jackpot probability is set high, the jackpot game is used. Due to the large number of balls, the total ball ejection performance may be high. On the contrary, even if the ball ejection performance based on the ease of winning the first starting winning opening or the general winning opening is high, if the jackpot probability is set low, the jackpot game is used. Due to the small number of balls, the total ball ejection performance may be low. Further, on the game hall side, while raising the game set value, there is a possibility that the nail adjustment is made so that the game ball is difficult to win in the first starting winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, in a game machine in which the game hall side can set the jackpot probability from a plurality of stages of jackpot probabilities (game set values), the player has an advantageous ball ejection performance simply by checking the physical state of the game machine from the outside. It cannot be determined whether it is a game machine.

In addition, the jackpot probability (game set value) is difficult to converge with a small number of trials, and while the jackpot may be won with a higher probability than the actual jackpot probability, the jackpot is won with a lower probability than the actual jackpot probability. Sometimes. In addition, the ease of winning a game ball into the first winning opening or the like is difficult to converge in a short game, and variations occur. As a result, despite the high ball ejection performance, the player gives up in a short time and moves to another game machine, and conversely, the game continues for a long time despite the low ball ejection performance. Can happen.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the variable game and the jackpot game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the ball ejection performance can be displayed on the sub image display unit 38. Here, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is selected based on a plurality of indexes including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the game machine 10. Therefore, the player confirms the ball ejection performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, and based on a plurality of indexes including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the game machine 10, the game machine 10 The ball ejection performance can be estimated, and the ball ejection performance can be judged individually for each of a plurality of indexes. As a result, the player can enjoy estimating the ball ejection performance of the game machine 10, and thus the interest of the game is improved.

Further, for a player who selects the game machine 10 based on the ball ejection performance, the player may give up in a short time and move to another game machine despite the high ball ejection performance, or the ball ejection performance. It is possible to prevent the player from continuing the game for a long time even though the game is low.

In the present embodiment, the display of the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the variable game is executed in the sub image display unit 38, but even if the display of the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the variable game is executed in the symbol display unit 341. Good. In this case, it is preferable to display the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the corner of the symbol display unit 341 such as the lower right corner portion (see FIG. 52) of the symbol display unit 341 so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the variable game effect. Further, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is not limited to the one in which the performance information is suggested by the character type and the character mode type. For example. As shown in FIG. 52, the performance information may be suggested by the combination of the character aspect and the dialogue. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the dialogue suggests the first performance information such as the game setting value, and the character mode suggests the second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery. .. Further, in addition to or instead of displaying the dialogue on the symbol display unit 341, the ball ejection performance may be suggested by the voice effect by the speaker 26.

In the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image simultaneously suggests the ball ejection performance based on a plurality of ball ejection information (game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery), but the ball ejection performance suggestion image is each performance information. A plurality of images corresponding to (ball ejection performance) may be included. In this case, the symbol display unit 341 may display a plurality of ball ejection performance suggestion images, the sub image display unit 38 may display a plurality of ball ejection performance suggestion images, and as shown in FIG. 53. The ball ejection performance suggestion image may be displayed on both the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38. In this way, since the ball ejection performance is suggested by the plurality of images corresponding to the performance information (ball ejection performance), it becomes easy to individually estimate the ball ejection performance. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to decide whether to continue or stop the game according to the ball ejection performance which is important in selecting the game machine.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, a first ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the first ball ejection performance such as a game setting value is displayed on the sub image display unit 38, and a unit jackpot is displayed in the lower right corner of the symbol display unit 341. The second ball ejection performance suggestion image that suggests the second ball ejection performance, which is the first performance information such as the rank of the number of lottery, is displayed at the overlapping timing. By displaying the first ball ejection performance suggestion image on the sub image display unit 38 and displaying the second ball ejection performance suggestion image on the symbol display unit 341, the game is played on both the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38. Can be focused on. As a result, a player who has little interest in the game production is given an opportunity to pay attention to the game production, and the fun of the game production can be conveyed to the player. Further, by displaying the first ball ejection performance suggestion image and the second ball ejection performance suggestion image at the overlapping timing, the player can use the same ball ejection performance suggestion image and the second ball ejection performance suggestion image. Since it can be confirmed at the time, it is possible to easily determine the ball ejection performance based on the two types of ball ejection performance.

Further, in the round game production, the game setting value is suggested by the character character, and the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery is suggested depending on the mode of the specific character. However, as shown in FIG. 54, the character introduction image is displayed in the round game production. The first performance information such as the game setting value is suggested by the character type to be displayed and introduced, and the second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number is obtained depending on the frame color of the character introduction image. It may be suggested. Further, the second performance information may be suggested by the frame pattern of the character introduction image, the background color, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image can be displayed in both the variable game and the jackpot game, but the ball ejection performance suggestion image may be displayed in one of the variable game and the jackpot game. Further, in addition to or in place of one or both of the variable game and the jackpot game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image may be displayed in the customer waiting standby state (the state in which the variable display is not held and the game ball is not fired). .. For example, in the customer waiting state, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on condition that a predetermined operation (long press operation or repeated hit operation) is performed on the operation button 20 and a command is input to the cross key (not shown). It is also conceivable to display it.

Further, in the variable game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied as described above, and the specific condition in this case is, for example, that the number of launched game balls reaches a certain number. It is conceivable that the operation button 20 is operated at a timing such as immediately after the start or immediately before the end of the variable game, or that a specific effect is executed. In this case, the specific effect is preferably an effect that the player does not misunderstand as an effect that suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and for example, an effect that requires the player to hit left or right can be considered. .. Further, the specific effect may be an effect that requires an operation on the operation button 20. By executing the ball ejection performance suggestion effect when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can predict the timing at which the ball ejection performance suggestion effect is executed. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while anticipating the timing at which the ball ejection performance suggestion effect is executed and looking forward to the arrival of that timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the jackpot game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image may be displayed in at least one of the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the interval between the round games is added to or instead of the round game. The ball ejection performance suggestion image may be displayed with.

Further, it is conceivable that the suggestion of the ball ejection performance is executed by the sound output effect by the speaker 26 or the lamp effect by the illumination unit 27 in addition to or instead of the image effect. For example, the ball ejection performance may be suggested by the type of music (BGM) output in the jackpot game. In addition, the ball ejection performance may be suggested by changing the music (BGM) in the middle of the jackpot game. When suggesting ball ejection performance by changing the music (BGM), the player can output the music output from the speaker 26 even if the player has not confirmed the symbol display unit 341 or the sub image display unit 38. It becomes possible to estimate the ball ejection performance based on BGM). In addition, since the ball ejection performance suggestion production is a music change production, attention is paid to the music (BGM) output from the speaker 26 in order to estimate the ball ejection performance even for the player who is indifferent to the music (BGM). It is possible to entertain the music (BGM).

Further, when the ball ejection performance is suggested by the change of the music (BGM), the ball ejection performance may be suggested by the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change. For example, it is conceivable that the music type before the change suggests the ball ejection performance such as the game setting value, and the music type after the change suggests the number of unit jackpot lottery and other ball ejection information. When the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change suggests the ball ejection performance, the player ejects the ball based on not only whether or not the music change occurs but also the combination of the music before and after the change. It becomes possible to estimate the performance. As a result, even a player who is indifferent to the music can pay more attention to the music output from the speaker 26.

Further, when the ball ejection performance is suggested by the change of the music (BGM), the ball ejection performance may be suggested by the timing when the music is changed (for example, the round of the open / close execution mode). Specifically, the BGM may be changed with a higher probability than other round games in the round game corresponding to the game set value (for example, 4 rounds when the game set value is 4). In addition, when the game setting value is odd (1 or 3), the BGM is changed with a higher probability in the odd round than in the even round, and when the game setting value is even (2 or 4), the BGM is odd. BGM may be changed with a higher probability in even rounds than in rounds. When the ball ejection performance is suggested by the change of the music (BGM), the ball ejection performance can be estimated from the round game in which the music change occurs. Therefore, the player can estimate the ball ejection performance not only by whether or not the music output from the speaker 26 changes, but also by the number of rounds in which the music change occurs. As a result, even a player who is indifferent to the music can be focused on the music output from the speaker 26, and a symbol is displayed to confirm the round game in which the music change has occurred. It is possible to pay attention to the display unit such as unit 341. As a result, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the round game production, and it is possible to convey the fun of the round game production to the player.

When suggesting the ball ejection performance by changing the music (BGM), it is also possible to suggest the ball ejection performance by both the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change and the timing when the music is changed. Be done.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the game machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario including the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed is based on the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table. Has been described when is determined. That is, the case where it depends on the effect scenario in which whether or not the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game in the open / close execution mode is described has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball exceeding the upper limit number (“9” in the present embodiment) is won in the variable winning opening 316 in the round game (when a so-called over winning occurs), the round in the open / close execution mode. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the game. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determining process (see step S2503 in FIG. 40) of the jackpot game effect determining process, the opening / closing execution mode effect that does not include the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario in which the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed. It is also different from the above-described first embodiment in that the effect scenario in the open / close execution mode is determined based on the scenario selection table.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIGS. 55 and 56 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the round game end command and the variable winning opening winning command have been received in the command determination process of the first embodiment described above. Judgment processing has been added.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 55, when the received command is neither a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, or a round game end command (No in steps S2302, S2307, and S2310), the MPU 51 issues a round game end command. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (step S2701). The round game end command is set, for example, when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 16, and is voiced in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 5.

When the MPU 51 receives the round game end command (step S2701: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to on (step S2702). The round game effect end flag is referred to in step S2803 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, which will be described later. Further, when the round game end command has not been received (step S2701: No), the process proceeds to step S2312 of FIG. 56.

<Steps S2703 and S2704>
When the MPU 51 has not received the round game end command (step S2701: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, the received commands are the ending start command, the jackpot game end command, the game setting value change command, and the unit jackpot lottery. If it is neither of the number update commands (No in any of steps S2313, S2315, S2317 and S2319), it is determined whether or not the variable winning opening winning command has been received (step S2703). The variable winning opening winning command is set in the RAM 412 together with the winning ball command when setting the winning ball command when the variable winning opening 316 has won a prize in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16, for example. This is a flag transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

When the MPU 51 receives the variable winning opening winning command (step S2703: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning opening winning flag to ON (step S2704), and ends the command determination process. The variable winning opening winning flag is referred to in step S3001 of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing of FIG. 59, which will be described later.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing of the present embodiment, the content of the round game effect start process is different from that of the first embodiment described above. Along with this, in the jackpot game effect processing of the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing is added, and the processing (step) necessary for executing the round game production start processing and the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing is added. ing. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5.

<Steps S2801 and S2802>
As shown in FIG. 57, in the jackpot game effect processing of the present embodiment, the round game effect start process is executed on condition that the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2604: Yes). (Step S2801), the round game executing flag is set to on (step S2802). The details of the round game production start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. Further, the round game execution flag is a flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and is referred to in step S2803 for determining whether or not to execute the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process.

<Steps S2803 and S2804>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game execution flag set on in step S2802 is set to on. When the round game execution flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process (step S2804), and performs the jackpot game effect processing. In the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process, when it is determined that the ball ejection performance suggestion image is to be displayed on the sub image display unit 38, a process for displaying the ball ejection performance suggestion image on the sub image display unit 38 is executed. To. That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether to display the ball ejection performance suggestion image during the execution of the round game, and the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the round game. The details of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

<Steps S2805 to S2807>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag set to be turned on in step S2702 of the command determination process of FIG. 55 is set to on. When the round game effect end flag is set to on (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game in-execution flag indicating that the round game is being executed to off (step S2806), and rounds. The game effect end flag is set to off (step S2807), and the jackpot game effect process ends. On the other hand, when the round game end flag is set to off (step S2805: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to 2607.

[Round game production start processing]
In the round game effect start process executed in step S2801 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, a process of starting the round game effect is executed. Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggestion image display flag is set to ON. The suggestion image display flag is a flag for displaying the ball ejection performance suggestion image on the symbol display unit 341 in the round game, and is set to on in step S3008 of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 59, which will be described later. .. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2902 when the suggestion image display flag is set to on (step S2901: Yes), and when the ball ejection performance suggestion image display flag is set to off (step S2901). : No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2802 and S2803>
When the suggestion image display flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 of the ball ejection performance suggestion image stored in the RAM 512 in step S3007 of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 59, which will be described later. The contents are read out (step S2902), and the contents of the ball ejection performance suggestion image are erased from the RAM 512 (step S2903).

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 transmits a round game start command to the display control device 6. The round game start command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute an image effect of the round game effect. Further, when the suggestion image display flag is set to on (step S2901: Yes), the round game start command includes information on the ball ejection performance suggestion image type. As a result, in the round game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed.

[Image display processing suggesting ball ejection performance]
In the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process executed in step S2804 in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 57, the presence / absence of display of the ball ejection performance suggestion image and the image type in the open / close execution mode are determined. Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing executed in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 57.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 59, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable winning opening winning flag set to be on in step S2704 in the command determination process of FIG. 56 is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002 when the variable winning opening winning flag is set to on (step S3001: Yes), and when the variable winning opening winning flag is set to off (step S3001: No). , The ball ejection performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When the variable winning opening winning flag is set to on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3002) and sets the variable winning opening winning flag to off (step S3002). S3003). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of game balls that have won the variable winning opening 316.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter (the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening 316) exceeds the upper limit. The "upper limit number" is set to the same number as the number of winning game balls in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed before the predetermined time (maximum opening time) elapses. In the present embodiment, the "upper limit number" is, for example, ". 9 ". That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an over-winning has occurred in which a game ball exceeding the upper limit is entered in the variable winning opening 316. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005 when the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004: Yes), and when the value of the winning counter does not exceed the upper limit number (step S3004: No). ), The ball ejection performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

<Step S3005>
When the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game is the final round in the open / close execution mode (step S3005). When the round game is the final round (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process. That is, if there is an over prize in the final round in the open / close execution mode, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is not displayed. On the other hand, when the round game is not the final round (step S3005: No), the MPU 51 determines the ball ejection performance suggestion image (step S3006) and stores the content of the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the RAM 512 (step S3007). .. Then, the MPU 51 sets the ball ejection performance suggestion image display flag to on (step S3008), and ends the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process. That is, when an over-winning occurs in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 51 sets the flag during the display of the ball ejection performance suggestion image to on, so that it is next to the round game in which the over-winning occurs. In the round game of, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed.

By the way, in order to save the number of launching game balls in the interval between round games in the jackpot game, there is a technique called stop striking in which the launch of the game balls in the interval is stopped. When such a stop hit is performed, the player repeatedly launches and stops launching the game ball while counting the number of game balls to be won in the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the variable winning opening 316 without checking the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38 in the round game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open / close execution mode, a ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the next round game of the round game in which the over-winning occurs. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who makes a stop hit launch an extra game ball for generating an over prize, and it is possible to pay attention to the symbol display unit 341 in the round game. In particular, a player who makes a stop shot tends to emphasize the ball ejection performance as a criterion for selecting the game machine 10, so in order to pay attention to the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38, the ball is ejected by over winning. It is of great significance to display the performance suggestion image on the sub image display unit 38 (or the symbol display unit 341 or both the sub image display unit 38 and the symbol display unit 341).

Further, when the ball ejection performance suggestion effect is executed in the next round game of the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is over-winned, the performance suggestion effect is executed in a short time from the over-winning. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the timing at which the performance suggestion effect is executed, and can prevent the player from forgetting to confirm the performance suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is not displayed when there is an over prize in the final round of the open / close execution mode, but the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed in the ending when there is an over prize in the final round. It may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the ball ejection performance suggestion effect is not executed when there is an over prize in the final round game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the variable game, the character of the ball ejection performance suggestion image is selected based on the game setting value suggestion character selection table (see FIG. 36) selected according to the game setting value (FIG. 34). (See steps S2404 and S2405), a case where the character mode is determined based on the character mode selection table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) selected according to the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery has been described (FIG. 34). (See steps S2407 and S2408).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variable game, the game set value and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number are converted into points, and the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed based on the table selected according to the total points obtained by totaling these points. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is determined and the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. In the following, the "total point" may be referred to as "total Pt" including the reference drawing.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Image display processing suggesting ball ejection performance]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing, when the value of the jackpot lottery counter is “0” when the fluctuation pattern command is received (step S2402: Yes), that is, the number of jackpot lottery is 1000 times. When the score reaches, the game set value stored in the RAM 512 and the number of unit jackpot lottery are acquired (steps S2404 and S2406), and the total points (total Pt) are calculated (step S3101). Specifically, the MPU 51 calculates the total points by adding up the addition points set according to the game set value and the addition points set according to the number of unit jackpot lottery.

Here, FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B) are diagrams showing an example of a point table used in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the set point table defines additional points according to the game set value. In the setting point table, when the game setting value is 4, the addition points are 4 points, when the game setting value is 3, the addition points are 3 points, when the game setting value is 2, the addition points are 2 points, and the game setting value. When is 1, the addition point is 1 point. That is, the additional points of the game set value are set higher as the game set value is higher, and the higher the points, the higher the ball ejection performance.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the lottery number point table defines additional points according to the unit jackpot lottery number (rank). In the lottery number point table, when the number of unit jackpot lottery is 25 or more (rank S), the additional points are 5 points, and when the number of unit jackpot lottery is 20 or more and less than 25 (rank A), the additional points are 4 points. If the number of unit jackpot lottery is 15 or more and less than 20 (rank B), the additional points are 3 points, and if the number of unit jackpot lottery is 10 or more and less than 15 (rank C), the additional points are 2 points. When the number of jackpot lottery is less than 10 (rank D), the additional points are 1 point. That is, the points to be added for the number of unit jackpot lottery (rank) are set higher as the number of unit jackpot lottery is larger (the higher the rank), and the higher the points, the higher the ball ejection performance.

As described above, in the setting point table shown in FIG. 61 (A), the higher the game setting value, the higher the addition points are set, and in the lottery number point table shown in FIG. 61 (B), the larger the number of unit jackpot lottery (rank). The higher the value, the higher the points to be added. Therefore, it is shown that the higher the total points using the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lottery as indicators, the higher the ball ejection performance. That is, the total point is an index having a correlation with the ball ejection performance of the game machine 10. For example, if the game setting value is 1 and the number of unit jackpot lottery is 13 times, the addition point of the game setting value is 1 point, and the addition point of the unit jackpot lottery number is 2 points, so the total points are 3 points. (1 point + 2 points), which indicates that the ball ejection performance is low. Further, if the game set value is 3 and the number of unit jackpot lottery is 27 times, the total points are 8 points (3 points + 5 points), indicating that the ball ejection performance is high.

In the present embodiment, the total points are calculated when it is determined that the number of jackpot lottery has reached 1000 when the fluctuation start command is received, but the timing for calculating the total points is another timing. You may. For example, the total point may be calculated each time a fluctuation start command is received.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 selects a character image (total point suggestion character image) as a ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the total point calculated in step S3101, and displays the selected character image on the sub image display unit 38. It is displayed (step S2408). In the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed when it is determined that the number of jackpot lottery has reached 1000 times, but in this ball ejection performance suggestion image, the number of jackpot lottery has reached 1000 times. It may be displayed only in the variable game, for example, it may be displayed across a plurality of variable games, or it may be continuously displayed in the jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a total point suggestion character selection table referred to in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display process.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the total point suggestion character selection table, when the total point (total Pt) is "8" or "9", "Sam" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are difficult to select. When the total point (total Pt) is "6" or "7", "Marine" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are difficult to select. When the total point (total Pt) is "4" or "5", "warin" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are difficult to select. When the total point (total Pt) is "2" or "3", "urin" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are difficult to select.

In this way, "Sam" is easy to be selected when the total point (total Pt) is "8" or "9", and the character suggesting that the total point (total Pt) is high (high ball ejection performance). "Marine" is easy to select when the total point (total Pt) is "6" or "7", and the total point (total Pt) is relatively high (ball ejection performance is relatively high). It is a character that suggests (high), and "warin" is easy to select when the total point (total Pt) is "4" or "5", and the total point (total Pt) is relatively low (total Pt). It is a character that suggests that the ball ejection performance is relatively low), and "Urin" is easy to select when the total point (total Pt) is "2" or "3", and the total point (total Pt) It is a character that suggests that is low (low ball ejection performance).

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is determined using the tables prepared for each of the two performance information of the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lottery are converted into points, and the ball ejection performance is evaluated as a total point. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the ROM 511 required for storing the table is reduced as compared with the first embodiment described above, and the arithmetic processing procedure can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed based on the total points (ball ejection performance) in the variable game, but in the jackpot game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed based on the total points (ball ejection performance). May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total points of the added points based on the game set value and the added points based on the unit jackpot lottery number are used as an index showing the ball ejection performance, but the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number are used. It is also conceivable to set an index correlated with the ball ejection performance based on the combination of two or more performance information other than the combination of, and to suggest the ball ejection performance based on the index.

In addition, instead of adding the added points based on the game set value and the added points based on the number of unit jackpot lottery, these points are subtracted, multiplied, or divided to set an index correlated with the ball ejection performance. Alternatively, it is also conceivable to set an index correlated with the ball ejection performance based on a predetermined mathematical formula and suggest the ball ejection performance based on the obtained index.

In addition, one of the first performance information such as the game setting value and the second performance information other than the first performance information is converted into points, and the ball is put out based on the index added with the numerical value indicating the other performance information. It is also possible to suggest performance.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

Further, when determining the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the second embodiment described above, the method of selecting the ball ejection performance suggestion image (character image) in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the third embodiment described above, the game setting value and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number are converted into points, and the ball ejection performance is based on a table selected according to the total points (ball ejection performance) obtained by totaling these points. The case where the suggestion image is determined has been described (see steps S3101 and S3102 in FIG. 60).

On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that the ball ejection performance of the game machine 10 is calculated as the ball ejection expected value and the performance information is suggested based on the ball ejection expected value.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Image display processing suggesting ball ejection performance]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing, when the value of the jackpot lottery counter is “0” when the fluctuation pattern command is received (step S2402: Yes), that is, the number of jackpot lottery is 1000 times. When it reaches, the expected value of the ball output is calculated (step S3201).

As described above, the expected number of balls to be ejected is the expected number of balls to be ejected (paid out) with respect to the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. The ratio of the number of game balls). The expected payout value is 100% when the total number of fired game balls (total number of out balls) and the expected number of payout balls (payout game balls) are the same, and the expected number of balls to be paid out (payout game). It is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and less than 100% when the expected number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) is smaller. That is, when the expected value of ball ejection exceeds 100%, it is advantageous for the player, and the higher the value, the higher the ball ejection performance. On the other hand, when the expected value of ball ejection is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the value, the lower the ball ejection performance.

In addition, the expected number of balls to be paid out (number of payout game balls) is a normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), a short game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a probabilistic game state (high probability mode). It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of the probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the jackpot game state, and the theoretical number of balls to be played in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each game state is, for example, a game setting value (big hit probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B))), a distribution rate of each big hit type ( (See FIG. 7 (C)), calculated based on the number of unit jackpot lottery, bonus ratio, and the like. In addition, the number of balls to be paid out (number of game balls to be paid out) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) other than the normal game state (short-time game state, probabilistic game state, and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive villas for the first hit and the distribution rate of the jackpot type (Fig.). 7 (C)), calculated based on the theoretical difference number of balls for each jackpot type, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, and the like.

In addition, the expected ball output value may be evaluated as a sufficiency rate with respect to the borderline. Here, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery required for the ball rental per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected ball output value to 100%, and this borderline is the jackpot lottery probability. The calculation is performed on the assumption that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit. That is, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the difference is ± 0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. In addition, various methods for calculating the borderline have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls lent for 1000 yen / (the average number of balls to be played in the jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls rented per 1000 yen is generally 250 balls. In addition, the average number of balls to be played in the jackpot game is the number of balls to be played per jackpot game when the number of round games in the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. The total probability is the average jackpot winning probability when the high probability mode and the low probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical value. Then, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is calculated as the ratio between the number of unit jackpot lottery and the borderline. When the sufficiency rate of this borderline exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous to the player, and when it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the number of unit jackpot lottery is 18 and the borderline is 20, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 selects a character image (expected ball ejection value suggestion character image) as a ball ejection performance suggestion image suggesting the expected ball ejection value calculated in step S3201, and subimages the selected character image. It is displayed on the display unit 38 (step S2408).

Here, FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a ball ejection expected value suggestion character selection table referred to in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing, and FIG. 64 (B) is an expected value showing a tank of the ball ejection expected value. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank correspondence table.
Is.

As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in the expected ball ejection value suggestion character selection table, the expected ball ejection value suggestion character type is defined for each expected ball ejection value rank according to the expected value suggestion effect selection table. Here, the expected ball ejection value rank is an index indicating the magnitude of the expected ball ejection value, and as shown in FIG. 64 (B), when the expected ball ejection value is 115% or more, it is "rank S". "Rank A" when the expected ball output value is 105% or more and less than 115%, "Rank B" when the expected ball output value is 95% or more and less than 105%, and the expected ball output value is 85% or more and less than 95%. Is defined as "Rank C", and the case where the expected ball output value is less than 85% is defined as "Rank D". In other words, in the expected ball ejection value rank, the expected ball ejection value is higher in the order of "rank S", "rank A", "rank B", "rank C" and "rank D" (the ball ejection performance is higher), and the first It is advantageous to the player in the order of.

Returning to the description of FIG. 64 (A), in the expected ball output value suggestion character selection table, when the expected ball output value rank is "rank S", "GOLD lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and the lottery of another embodiment Lucky is hard to choose. When the expected payout rank is "Rank A", "GOO lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are difficult to be selected. When the expected ball output rank is "Rank B", "normal lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are difficult to be selected. When the expected payout rank is "Rank C", "BAD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other modes of Whale Lucky are difficult to be selected. When the expected payout rank is "Rank D", "BKACK lottery lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are difficult to be selected. In addition, "Shou Whale Lucky" is distributed only when the expected ball output rank is "Rank S".

As described above, "Shou Whale Lucky" is selected only when the expected ball ejection value rank is "Rank S", and is an image suggesting the expected ball ejection value clearly indicating that it is "Rank S". "GOLD lottery lucky" is easy to be selected when the expected ball ejection value rank is "rank S", and is an image suggesting the expected ball ejection value suggesting that it is "rank S". "GOO lottery lucky" is easy to be selected when the expected ball ejection value rank is "rank A", and is an image suggesting the expected ball ejection value suggesting that it is "rank A". "Normal lottery lucky" is easily selected when the expected ball ejection value rank is "rank B", and is an image suggesting the expected ball ejection value suggesting that it is "rank B". "BAD lottery lucky" is easily selected when the expected ball ejection value rank is "rank C", and is an image suggesting the expected ball ejection value suggesting that it is "rank C". "BLACK lottery lucky" is easily selected when the expected ball ejection value rank is "rank D", and is an image suggesting the expected ball ejection value suggesting that it is "rank D".

By the way, in the above-mentioned third embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed based on the two performance information of the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number. Therefore, the above-mentioned third embodiment has an advantage that the arithmetic processing is simple. On the other hand, the game set value is an index that reflects the jackpot probability, and has no correlation with the distribution of the jackpot type. In addition, the number of unit jackpot lottery is related to the magnitude of the number of jackpot lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and has a correlation with the ball output in the game state other than the normal game state. Absent. Therefore, in the third embodiment described above, the number of balls released in the jackpot game state (number of difference balls), the average number of consecutive villas for the first hit, the number of balls released in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state (number of difference balls). Although such factors are not taken into consideration and there is an advantage as a simple method, the ball ejection performance of the game machine 10 is not appropriately reflected.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance is evaluated based on the total expected ball ejection value including the gaming state other than the normal gaming state, and the ball ejection performance is suggested. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance to the player based on the performance information that appropriately reflects the ball ejection performance of the game machine 10.

In the present embodiment, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed based on the ball ejection performance expected value (ball ejection performance) in the variable game, but in the jackpot game, the ball ejection performance suggestion image is displayed based on the ball ejection expected value. It may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

Further, when determining the ball ejection performance suggestion image in the second embodiment described above, the method of selecting the ball ejection performance suggestion image (character image) in the ball ejection performance suggestion image display processing in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the ball ejection performance is suggested in the sub image display unit 38 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game set value is displayed on the special main display unit, and the game set value can be visually recognized by the downward movement of the retention box arranged on the front side of the special main display unit. Is different from the embodiment of.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 65 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the Kroon device 36 (an example of the distribution device) and the retention box 39 (visual recognition limiting means) are on the right side of the symbol display unit 341 on the game board 31. , A discharge port 319, and a special main display unit 37a (performance information display means) are provided.

67 is a perspective view showing an example of the Kroon device 36, FIG. 68A is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. 67, and FIG. 68B is taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 67. It is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the Kroon device 36 distributes the game ball launched into the right region of the game board 31 to either the normal entry port 367 or the special out ball opening 363 described later. .. The Kroon device 36 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 361 and an annular peripheral wall 362 surrounding the bottom wall 361. The bottom wall 361 is circular in a plan view, and has a high bottom portion 361a, a low bottom portion 361b, and a downward-sloping inclined portion 361c provided between the high bottom portion 361a and the low bottom portion 361b.

The high bottom portion 361a constitutes a right side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom portion 361a is provided with a special out ball passage 364 having a special out ball mouth 363 (special discharge port). The special out-ball passage 364 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 361c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 361a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 364 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered through the special out ball mouth 363 to the retention box 39 as described later, and has a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Is formed in. Then, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 363 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316, and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 363 cannot be expected to enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it has passed through the special out ball mouth 363, or is special. When it is introduced into the out ball passage 364, it is treated as an out ball.

The special out ball mouth 363 is an upper opening of the special out ball passage 364 and is open at the higher bottom portion 361a. Further, the special out ball mouth 363 is surrounded by an obstruction wall 365 (inhibition means) protruding upward from the high bottom portion 361a. The obstruction wall 365 inhibits the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 363 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter, and includes a large inhibition wall 365a and a small inhibition wall 365b.

The large obstruction wall 365a is provided in the right half of the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 363. That is, the large obstruction wall 365a is provided in a portion close to the peripheral wall 362 and far from the inclined portion 361c, and obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 from the right half side of the special out ball mouth 363. Further, the height dimension of the large obstruction wall 365a is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore, it cannot be expected that the game ball 99 will enter the special out ball mouth 363 from the large obstruction wall 365a side.

On the other hand, the small obstruction wall 365b is provided in the left half of the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 363. That is, the small obstruction wall 365b is provided in a far portion far from the peripheral wall 362 and close to the inclined portion 361c, and obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 from the left half side of the special out ball mouth 363. Further, the height dimension of the small obstruction wall 365b is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore, with respect to the special out ball mouth 363, the small inhibition wall 365b side (special out ball mouth 363) is compared with the game ball 99 from the large inhibition wall 365a side (the right half side of the special out ball mouth 363). You can expect the game ball 99 to enter from the left half side).

The low bottom portion 361b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined so as to be low toward the center. The lower bottom 361b is provided with a normal passage 368 having a normal entry port 367. The normal passage 368 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 361c, except for a portion along the peripheral wall 362 in the lower bottom portion 361b. This normal passage 368 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered through the normal entry port 367 to the lower right of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball mouth 363. Is formed in. Further, a guide member 369 for discharging the game ball 99 passing through the normal passage 368 from a fixed position is connected to the lower end portion of the normal passage 368. The guide member 369 has a smaller cross-sectional area on the lower side than the upper side, and the lower part of the guide member 369 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 99.

In such a Kroon device 36, the game ball 99 launched in the right region of the game board 31 moves on the bottom wall 361 along the peripheral wall 362. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the Kroon device 36. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 361 collide with the peripheral wall 362 of the Kroon device 36, the obstruction wall 365, or another game ball 99, for example, because the kinetic energy becomes small. Normally, the ball enters the ball entry port 367. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal entry port 367 moves through the normal passage 368 and the guide member 369 and is released from a fixed position. Then, the game ball 99 released from a fixed position can enter the second winning opening 315 and the variable winning opening 316, and can pass through the through gate 317.

On the other hand, a part of the game ball 99 (for example, 0.01% to 1%) that moves on the bottom wall 361 usually changes its moving direction at the periphery of the entrance 367 and collides with another game ball 99. It moves toward the small obstruction wall 365b of the special out ball mouth 363, overcomes the small obstruction wall 365b, and enters the special out ball mouth 363. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 363 moves through the special out ball passage 364 and is discharged toward the retention box 39.

In the present embodiment, the special out ball mouth 363 is provided at the high bottom portion 361a of the bottom wall 361, the normal entry ball opening 367 has a larger opening area than the special out ball mouth 363, and the special out ball mouth 363 inhibits. Since it is surrounded by the wall 365, the special out ball mouth 363 is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal ball entrance 367, but in place of all or part of these or In addition, it is conceivable that it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 363 by other means. For example, generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 around the special out ball mouth 363, forming an air curtain by ejecting air around the special out ball mouth 363, and special out. It is conceivable to place an obstacle (a form different from the obstruction wall 365) that obstructs the entry of the ball into the ball mouth 363.

Here, FIG. 69 (A) is a front view showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is in the upper limit position, FIG. 69 (B) is a vertical sectional view of FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 69 (C). ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 69 (A). Further, FIG. 70 (A) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (B) showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is in the lower limit position, and FIG. 70 (B) shows the retention box 39 in the lower limit position. FIG. 70 (C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings in a certain case, and FIG. 70 (C) shows the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is in an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. FIG. 70 (D) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (B) showing and its periphery, and FIG. 70 (D) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the residence box 39 and its periphery when the retention box 39 is in the intermediate position. Is.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the retention box 39 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36, and keeps the game ball 99 inside until a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is to stay. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is that a certain time elapses after the retention box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position (see FIGS. 70A and 70B) described later. The retention box 39 has an upper opening 391 that allows the acceptance of the game ball 99. The retention box 39 has a front wall 392a, a rear wall 392b, a left side wall 392c, a right side wall 392d, and a bottom wall 392e, and a retention space 393 in which a certain number of game balls 99 are retained by these walls 392a to 392e is defined. Has been done. Further, the retention box 39 is formed to be opaque as a whole (for example, black or white), which makes the back surface side of the retention box 39 invisible or difficult to see.

The retention box 39 has an upper limit position (see FIG. 69) that covers the entire front surface of the special main display unit 37a and a lower limit position (FIG. 70 (A) and 70) that is entirely below the special main display unit 37a. It is possible to move in the vertical direction D2 with (see (B)). As shown in FIG. 71, the residence box 39 is driven by a motor 39a connected to the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the residence box 39 is moved downward by, for example, the MPU 51 rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and moved up by the MPU 51 rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction. The motor 39a is, for example, a stepping motor, and the retention box 39 can be formed at a predetermined position by controlling the number of drive pulses input to the motor 39a.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (C) and 70 (D), the retention box 39 can be stopped at a plurality of intermediate positions set between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. When the retention boxes 39 are located at a plurality of intermediate positions, a part of the special main display unit 37a is visible, and the opening 394 of the retention box 39 does not communicate with the discharge port 319 of the game board 31. That is, when the retention box 39 is in the intermediate position, the game ball 99 of the retention box 39 stays in the retention box 39 without being discharged to the outside. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the retention box 39 can be stopped at three intermediate positions (see FIGS. 73 and 74) corresponding to the downward movement levels 1 to 3. At the intermediate position of the lower movement level 1, it is possible to determine whether the segment A of the special main display unit 37a is turned on or off, and at the intermediate position of the lower movement level 2, it is determined whether the segments B and F of the special main display unit 37a are turned on or off. It is possible, and it is possible to determine whether the segment G of the special main display unit 37a is turned on or off at the intermediate position of the lower movement level 3. Note that the intermediate position is, for example, in the segments C and E of the special main display unit 37a, in addition to the positions corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3 or at least one of the positions corresponding to the lower movement levels 1 to 3. It may be set at a position where it can be determined whether it is turned on or off, or at a position where it can be determined whether the segment D of the special main display unit 37a is turned on or off. The range in which the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized differs at each intermediate position, and the range in which the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized increases as the retention box 39 approaches the lower limit position. Further, the position of the retention box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls retained inside (the number of retained game balls), and the larger the number of retained game balls, the lower the position (see FIG. 74 (C)). This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.

The stay box 39 does not necessarily have to be entirely opaque, and at least one of the front wall 392a and the rear wall 392b may be opaque. Further, the retention box 39 is allowed to be transparent in a range where the special main display unit 37a is invisible or difficult when it is in the upper limit position.

Further, an opening 394 is formed in the lower part of the rear wall 392b of the retention box 39. As shown in FIGS. 70 (C) and 70 (D), the opening 394 communicates with the discharge port 319 that penetrates the game board 31 when the retention box 39 is in the lower limit position. As a result, when the retention box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position, the game ball 99 of the retention box 39 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. Further, the bottom wall 392e of the retention box 39 is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear side. As a result, when the opening 394 and the discharge port 319 are communicated with each other, it is promoted that the game ball 99 of the retention box 39 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. To.

Further, on the left side wall 392c of the retention box 39, a special out-ball sensor 35a is provided in the vicinity of the upper opening 391. The special out-ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39, and is, for example, a reflection type optical sensor. Of course, as the special out-ball sensor 35a, other types of known sensors such as a transmission type optical sensor and an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can also be used. Further, the special out ball sensor 35a may be provided in the special out ball passage 364 of the Kroon device 36.

As shown in FIG. 71, the special out-ball sensor 35a is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the output from the special out-ball sensor 35a is monitored by the MPU 41, so that the MPU 41 plays in the retention box 39. It is determined whether or not the ball 99 has been entered. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command when the game ball 99 is inserted into the retention box 39, and voices this special out-ball detection command in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out-ball detection command, the voice lamp control device 5 executes the retention box lowering process for lowering the retention box 39 by controlling the motor 39a by the MPU 51 (FIGS. 76 and 77). reference). Further, when the retention box 39 is moved to the lower limit position, the MPU 51 returns the retention box 39 to the upper limit position after a certain period of time has elapsed. Details of this point will be described later in the retention box return process of FIG. 78.

The special out-ball sensor 35a may be connected to the voice lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out-ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the voice lamp control device 5 moves the retention box based on the output from the special out-ball sensor 35a.

Here, FIG. 72 (A) is a front view showing an example of the special main display unit 37a, and FIG. 72 (B) is a diagram showing a display example of the special main display unit 37a.

As shown in FIG. 72 (A), the special main display unit 37a is composed of a so-called 7-segment display, and is composed of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and the dot point DP can be turned on and off individually. As shown in FIG. 72 (B), the special main display unit 37a displays the game set value stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. In the initialization process or start-up process executed when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the special main display unit 37a reads out the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 by the MPU 41, and the game setting value is read out. The numerical value corresponding to is displayed. Specifically, when the game setting value is 1, the special main display unit 37a displays the number 1 by lighting the segments B and C, and when the game setting value is 2, the segment A is displayed. , B, D, E and G are lit to display the number 2, and when the game setting value is 3, the segments A to D and G are lit to display the number 3 and the game is played. When the set value is 4, the segments B, C, F and G are lit to display the number 4, and when the game set value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F and G are lit. By doing so, the number 5 is displayed, and when the game setting value is 6, the numbers 6 are displayed by lighting the segments A, C to G.

In the special main display unit 37a, after the game set value is displayed in the initialization process or the start process, the game set value is continuously displayed until the main power is turned off. When the game setting value is changed, the changed game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a. For example, when displaying the changed game setting value on the game setting value display unit 45 in step S1709 of the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20, it is conceivable to display the changed game setting value on the special main display unit 37a. Be done. Further, the special main display unit 37a may be a display other than the 7-segment display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, as long as it can display a number from 1 to 6.

Here, FIGS. 73 (A) to 73 (C), 74 (A), and 74 (B) are diagrams schematically showing the visual state of the special main display unit 37a at each downward movement level. In these figures, only the portion of the retention box 39 located in front of the special main display unit 37a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the lower movement level of the retention box 39 is 5 levels of lower movement levels 0 to 4. Further, the higher the downward movement level of the retention box 39 (the larger the number of the downward movement level), the lower the retention box 39 is located, and the larger the area where the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), at the downward movement level 0, the retention box 39 is in the upper limit position, and the entire front side of the special main display unit 37a is covered by the retention box 39, and the special main The entire display unit 37a is invisible. That is, at the lower movement level 0, the game set value cannot be determined at all.

As shown in FIG. 73 (B), at the lower movement level 1, a part (upper half) of the segment A of the special main display unit 37a is visible. That is, at the lower movement level 1, it is possible to confirm that the segment A is turned on and off. Then, at the lower movement level 1, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6 when the segment A is lit, and the game setting value is set when the segment A is off. It can be determined that it is either 1 or 4. In other words, at the lower movement level 1, it is possible to determine which of the game setting values 1 and 4 and whether the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6 by turning on or off the segment A. ..

As shown in FIG. 73 (C), at the lower movement level 2, the entire segment A of the special main display unit 37a is visible, and a part (upper half) of the segments B and F is visible. That is, at the lower movement level 2, in addition to the lighting and extinguishing of the segment A, the lighting and extinguishing of the segments B and F can be confirmed. Then, at the lower movement level 2, when the segment B is lit and the segments A and F are extinguished, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, and when the segments B and F are lit and the segment A is extinguished. It can be determined that the game setting value is 4. Further, when the segments A and B are lit and the segment F is extinguished, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3, and when the segments A and F are lit and the segment B is extinguished. It can be determined that the game set value is 5 or 6. In other words, at the lower movement level 2, the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, or the game setting values are 2 and 3 depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B, and F, respectively. It can be determined which of the above and any of the game setting values 5 and 6.

As shown in FIG. 74 (A), at the lower movement level 3, all of the segments A, B, and F of the special main display unit 37a are visible, and a part (upper half) of the segment G is visible. is there. That is, at the lower movement level 3, it is possible to confirm the lighting and extinguishing of the segment G in addition to the lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B and F. Then, at the lower movement level 3, when the segment B is lit and the segments A, F and G are extinguished, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, the segments B, F and G are lit and the segment A is extinguished. If this is the case, it can be determined that the game setting value is 4. Further, when the segments A, B and G are lit and the segment F is extinguished, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3, and the segments A, F and G are lit and the segment B is extinguished. If so, it can be determined that the game set value is 5 or 6. In other words, at the lower movement level 3, the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, or the game setting value is 2 depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A, B, F, and G. And 3 can be determined, and which of the game set values 5 and 6 can be determined.

As shown in FIG. 74 (B), at the lower movement level 5, the retention box 39 is in the lower limit position, and all seven segments A to G of the special main display unit 37a are visible. That is, at the lower movement level 0, the game set value can be clearly confirmed.

Here, FIG. 74 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of stagnant game balls in the dwell box 39 and the downward movement level of the dwell box 39. As shown in FIG. 74 (C), the downward movement level of the stay box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls staying in the stay box 39 (the number of staying game balls). Specifically, the downward movement level of the retention box 39 is 0 when the retention box 39 is in the upper limit position when the number of retention game balls is 0, and 1 when the number of retention game balls is 1. It is 2 when the number of stagnant game balls is 2, 3, 3 when the number of stagnant game balls is 3, and 4 where the stagnant box 39 is at the lower limit position when the number of stagnant game balls is 4. As described above, when the retention box 39 is in the lower limit position, the game balls retained in the retention box 39 are discharged to the outside, so that the number of retention game balls in the retention box 39 becomes 0. In this case, The retention box 39 is moved to the upper limit position after a certain period of time after the retention box 39 is moved to the lower limit position.

Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when the residence box 39 moves down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position and returns from the lower limit position to the upper limit position will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. To do.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the game machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) are the same as those of the sub-timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. , Counter update process (step S2003), command determination process (step S3301), variable game effect process (step S2005), and jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process (step S3301) of the present embodiment is different from the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above in some steps. Further, in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, unlike the sub-timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) of the first embodiment described above, the stay box return process is executed (step S3302).

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 75.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If none of the above (No in steps S2302, S2307 and S2310), it is determined whether or not the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3401). The special out-ball detection command is a command set when it is detected by the special out-ball sensor 35a that the game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39 as described above, and is a command set in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301.

When the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the retention box lowering process (step S3402).

[Stay box down processing]
In the stagnation box downward processing, the stagnation box 39 is moved down to a position corresponding to the downward movement level (see FIG. 74 (C)) according to the number of game balls retained in the stagnation box 39. Here, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 77, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter added in step S3505 described later is 0. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3502 when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), and processes when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 0 (step S3501: No). To step S3504.

<Step S3502>
When the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the retention box return counter to a predetermined value. Here, the stagnation box return counter is a counter for determining the timing of returning to the upper limit position corresponding to the lower movement level 0 when the stagnation box 39 is moved downward, and is the stagnation box return processing of FIG. See in step S3603 in. The value of the retention box return counter is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from the start of the downward movement of the retention box 39 to the return to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0). Will be done.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 sets the retention box return standby flag to on. Here, the retention box return standby flag is a flag indicating that when the retention box 39 is moved downward, it is waiting for return to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0), and the retention box in FIG. 78, which will be described later. It is referred to in step S3601 in the return process.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the retention box 39 has been lowered to the lower limit position, and determines whether or not the retention box 39 is further lowered. When the value of the lower movement level counter is 4 (step S3504: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the lower movement processing of the retention box, and when the value of the lower movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), the processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S3505.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
When the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), or when the retention box return standby flag is turned on (step S3503), the MPU 51 is set to the value of the downward movement level counter indicated at the position of the retention box 39. 1 is added (step S3505), and the residence box 39 is moved down to a position corresponding to the lower movement level corresponding to the value of the lower movement level counter after the addition (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 stays at a position corresponding to the lower movement level one level higher than the lower movement level before receiving the special out-ball detection command by controlling the drive pulse input to the motor 39a (see FIG. 71). Move the box 39 down. For example, when the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the residence box 39 starts from the upper limit position (see FIG. 73 (A)) that covers the entire front surface of the special main display unit 37a. It is moved down to a position where the upper half of segment A is exposed (see FIG. 73 (B)). Further, when the lower movement level is changed from 1 to 2, the retention box 39 is moved down from the position shown in FIG. 73 (B) to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C), and the lower movement level is changed from 2. When it is changed to 3, it is moved down from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C) to the position shown in FIG. 74 (A), and when the down movement level is changed from 3 to 4, FIG. 74 (A) It is moved down from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 74 to the lower limit position shown in FIG. 74 (B). When the lower movement level is changed from 0 to 1, it can be estimated that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6 when the segment A of the special main display unit 37a is lit. When the segment A is turned off, it can be estimated that the game set value is either 1 or 4. Then, when the lower movement level is changed from 1 to 3, the number of estimated game setting values is gradually reduced by turning on or off the segment that becomes visible according to the lower movement level, and the game The set value can be narrowed down gradually. Then, at the lower movement level 4, since all the seven segments A to G of the special main display unit 37a are visible, the game set value can be recognized. As a result, the player estimates the game setting value step by step according to the number of special out balls (the number of visible segments of the special main display unit 37a), and the larger the number of special out balls, the higher the accuracy of estimation. Since it is possible to improve it step by step, you can enjoy the process of estimating the game set value.

As described above, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a part or all of the game setting values displayed on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized by a simple method of moving the retention box 39 downward. The state can be realized.

Further, since the retention box 39 is moved down stepwise each time a game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 363, the visible area of the game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is gradually expanded. Will be done. As a result, the game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is gradually clarified, so that the game set value can be estimated and enjoyed until the game set value can be grasped. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be grasped can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Stay box return processing]
In the retention box return process, a process of returning the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is executed after a certain period of time has passed since the retention box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box return processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 78, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the retention box return standby flag set to be on in step S3505 in the retention box lowering process of FIG. 77 is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602 when the retention box return standby flag is set to on (step S3601: Yes), and when the retention box return standby flag is set to off (step S3601: No). , The stay box return processing is terminated.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
When the retention box return standby flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the retention box return counter set in step S3504 in the retention box lowering process of FIG. 77 (step S3601: Yes). Step S3602), it is determined whether or not the value of the retention box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a certain time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3604 when the value of the retention box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), and when the value of the retention box return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3603: No). ), The stay box return processing is terminated.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
When the value of the retention box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 returns the retention box 39 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position by controlling the drive pulse to be input to the motor 39a (step S3603: Yes). Step S3604). As a result, the time during which the entire special main display unit 37a is displayed is restricted to a fixed time, so that it is possible to prevent the game set value from being left for a long time in a visible state. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is not playing the game from grasping the game set value. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S3605), sets the retention box return standby flag to off (step S3606), and ends the retention box return processing.

By the way, in the game machine according to the first embodiment described above, the game set value is suggested or specified by the symbol display unit 341 and the sub image display unit 38. However, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the game playability is poor because the game setting value is suggested or specified as a part of the production. In particular, in the jackpot game, the jackpot game effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like, but for players who are not interested in the jackpot game effect, the jackpot game digests the number of round games according to the jackpot type. And it lacks playability.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game is hit right, such as in a big hit game, the game ball 99 stays stepwise by entering the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36, which is difficult to enter. The box 39 moves downward, and the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a can be gradually confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the Kroon device 36 enters the special out ball mouth 363 at the time of right-handed hitting such as a big hit game. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363, the game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is gradually clarified, so that the game set value is estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, the retention box 39 is stepped from the upper limit position to the lower limit position by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36 (detection of the game ball 99 by the retention box 39). However, the retention box 39 may be moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at once by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 363. In this way, when the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 363, the retention box 39 moves from the upper limit position where the game set value is invisible or difficult to see to the lower limit position where the entire game set value can be seen. Will be moved. Therefore, when the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 363, the game property that the game set value can be visually recognized is given, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the retention box 39 moves downward every time one game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363, but the retention box 39 is stepped every time a plurality of game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 363. It may be moved down in a target or at a stretch. Further, the retention box 39 expands the visible area by moving downward, but the visible area may be expanded by moving upward, or moves in the left direction, the right direction, the diagonal direction, or the like. By doing so, the visible area may be expanded.

Further, the retention box 39 may be moved downward by the weight of the game ball 99 staying in the retention box 39. In this case, for example, the retention box 39 may be urged upward by an urging means (visual state control means) such as a coil spring. Then, the retention box 39 can be moved downward in a stepwise manner according to the number of game balls retained inside, and the retention box 39 can be moved upward by discharging the game balls of the retention box 39.

Further, in the present embodiment, the retention box 39 is moved downward when the game ball 99 launched in the right area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball mouth 363, so that the special main display unit 37a is displayed. The displayed game setting value can be visually recognized, but the retention box 39 is moved when the game ball 99 launched in the left area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball mouth 363. The game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a may be made visible. In this case, the special main display unit 37a, the Kroon device 36, the retention box 39, and the like are arranged in the left side region or the central region of the game board 31.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 is normally distributed to the entry port 367 or the special out ball opening 363 by the Kroon device 36, but a distribution device having another configuration can also be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363, but other specific conditions are satisfied. By satisfying the requirements, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a may be made visible. Other specific conditions include, for example, that the number of jackpot lottery reaches a predetermined number of times, that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery continuously deviates from the predetermined number of times, and that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a predetermined number of jackpots. The total number of fired game balls is a certain number or more, the difference ball is a predetermined number or more plus, and the difference ball is a predetermined number or more minus. By making at least a part of the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a visible when the specific condition illustrated is satisfied, the player can see at least a part of the game setting value. It becomes possible to predict when it will be done. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while anticipating the timing at which the game setting value is displayed and looking forward to the arrival of that timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, when the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is made visible by satisfying other conditions, an opaque plate-shaped member is used as the front position of the special main display unit 37a instead of the retention box 39. By moving down between the lower position and the upper position of the special main display unit 37a, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a changes between an invisible or difficult-to-see state and a visible state. You may do so.

In addition, the special main display unit 37a may clearly indicate other ball ejection performance of the game set value. For example, depending on the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display unit 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, etc., at least one winning opening such as the number of unit jackpot lottery, the base, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, etc. The ball ejection performance based on the ball may be specified. In this case, it is conceivable to divide the other ball ejection performance into a plurality of ranks (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 38) and clearly indicate the rank. In this way, as an index showing the ball ejection performance, in addition to the game setting value, the ball ejection performance other than the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, so that the game ball 99 to the special out ball mouth 363 can be displayed. When a specific condition such as a ball entering is satisfied, it is possible to estimate or grasp other ball ejection performance in addition to the game set value. As a result, the playability is improved, and the motivation for continuing the game can be given.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game set value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a controlled by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 has been described, but the game set value is displayed on the display by the voice lamp control device 5. May be good. As the display in this case, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, or the like can be adopted. Then, it is also conceivable to display the game set value step by step or at once on the display that satisfies the specific condition.

In the present embodiment, instead of or in addition to the game set value, other performance information, for example, a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 is displayed on the special main display unit 37a. It may be. By displaying the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 on the special main display unit 37a, the player can, for example, among the game machines due to individual differences during manufacturing of the game machine 10 or changes over time. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning openings 313 to 316. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, and if the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 can be grasped, the game during the game is based on the performance information. An opportunity is given to decide whether to continue the game on the machine 10.

Here, examples of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 include unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous bonus ratio information, bonus ratio information, and the like.

Since the number of unit jackpot lottery is an index showing the ease of receiving the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (the state where the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode), part or all of the unit jackpot lottery count information is special main. By being displayed on the display unit 37a, it becomes possible to know how easy it is to receive the big hit lottery. As a result, the player enjoys estimating the number of unit jackpot lottery, and if the number of unit jackpot lottery can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit jackpot lottery. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

Since the base information is an index showing the ease of winning the first winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, a part or all of the base information is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, so that the first prize can be obtained. It becomes possible to know how easy it is to win a prize in the winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313. As a result, the player is given an opportunity to guess and enjoy the base, and if the base can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the game machine being played based on the base.

The continuous bonus ratio information includes the frequency with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state (stay ratio in the jackpot game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 (in the special game state). It is an index showing the ball output rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous bonus ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible to know the frequency of winning and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening 316. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, and if the continuous bonus ratio can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous bonus ratio. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

The accessory ratio information includes the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (stay ratio in the jackpot gaming state), the stay ratio in the high frequency support mode supported by the electric accessory 315b, and variable. It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315 (the ball output rate in the jackpot game state). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the character ratio, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible to know the frequency, the stay ratio of the high frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b is supported, and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315. As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess and enjoy the character ratio, and if the character ratio can be grasped, decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, the game set value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, and the game set value is made visible by the downward movement of the retention box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a. The case was explained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the translucent monitor is arranged on the front side of the special main display unit on which the game set value is displayed, and the game set value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor. It is different from the above-mentioned fifth embodiment in that the visibility of the light is changed.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the Kroon device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment and its surroundings, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. 79, and FIG. 81 (A) is a special main. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the display part 37a and the translucent monitor 39A.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the Kroon device 36, the discharge port 319, are on the right side of the symbol display unit 341 on the game board 31, as in the fifth embodiment described above. And a special main display unit 37a is provided. However, in the present embodiment, the retention box 39 in the fifth embodiment described above is not provided, and a translucent monitor 39A (translucent display device) is provided in place of the retention box 39. There is.

The Kroon device 36 has the same configuration as the Kroon device 36 of the fifth embodiment described above, but the guide member 370 is connected to the special out-ball passage 364. The guide member 370 guides the game ball 99 introduced in the special out ball passage 364 to the back side of the game board 31, and is also connected to the discharge port 319.

The translucent monitor 39A has a low transmittance state (light-shielding state) in which the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is low and the back side is invisible or difficult to see, and the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is high and the back side can be visually recognized. It is possible to change the visible light transmittance from the possible high transmittance state (transparent state). The translucent monitor 39A is set to a light-shielding state by displaying a single color such as black or white. Further, the translucent monitor 39A can realize a semi-transparent state having a plurality of intermediate visible light transmittances between the light-shielding state and the transparent state. The translucent monitor 39A is, for example, a transparent flat display such as an organic EL display or a liquid crystal display capable of realizing a transparent state. By adjusting the voltage applied to the monitor electrode, the presence or absence of voltage applied to each dot, and the like, the entire monitor It is possible to change the visible light transmission rate in. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the translucent monitor 39A is fixedly arranged in front of the special main display unit 37a. Therefore, by selecting the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A, it is possible to select a state in which the display content of the special main display unit 37a is invisible or difficult to see and a state in which it is visible. The degree of visibility (visualization level) in a visible state can be adjusted.

Here, FIG. 81B is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A and the visibility state of the special main display unit 37a. The visibility level is an index showing the visibility behind the translucent monitor 39A, and correlates with the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A.

As shown in FIG. 81 (B), the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is 5 levels from 0 to 4. Further, the higher the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A (the larger the number of the visibility level), the higher the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A, and the higher the visibility of the special main display unit 37a. At the visibility level 0, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low and the back of the translucent monitor 39A cannot be visually recognized, so that the display content on the special main display unit 37a cannot be confirmed at all. On the other hand, at the visibility level 4, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, so that the display contents on the special main display unit 37a can be confirmed without any problem. ..

Here, FIG. 81C is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special out-ball counts and the visibility level of the translucent monitor. The special out ball count number is the count number of the game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36. This special out-ball count number is counted based on the detection result of the special out-ball sensor 35a, but is cleared to 0 when the count number becomes 4.

As shown in FIG. 81 (C), the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is determined according to the number of special out-ball counts counted based on the detection result of the special out-ball sensor 35a. Specifically, the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is 0, which is invisible or difficult to see behind the translucent monitor 39A when the number of special out-ball counts is 0, and the number of special out-ball counts is 0. It is 1 when there is one, it is 2 when there are two special out ball counts, it is 3 when there are three special out ball counts, and it is when there are four special out ball counts. The back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible 4.

When the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is 4 so that the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, it is visible without waiting for the next game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 363. After a certain period of time after the level reaches 4, the back of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 0, which is invisible or difficult to see.

Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when changing the visibility level (visible light transmittance) of the translucent monitor 39A will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the game machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) are the same as the sub-timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) of the fifth embodiment described above. , Counter update process (step S2003), command determination process (step S3701), variable game effect process (step S2005), and jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process (step S3301) of the present embodiment is different from the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the fifth embodiment described above in some steps. Further, in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the light-shielding control process is executed instead of the retention box return process of the sub-timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) of the fifth embodiment described above (step S3702). ).

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 82.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If none of the above (No in steps S2302, S2307 and S2310), it is determined whether or not the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3801). The special out-ball detection command is a command set when it is detected by the special out-ball sensor 35a that the game ball 99 has entered the special out-ball mouth 363, and is a command set in step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of.

When the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the visual control process (step S3802).

[Visual control processing]
In the visual control process, a process of controlling the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is executed so that the visual level is set according to the number of special out-ball counts (see FIG. 81 (C)). Here, FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual control process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 83.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
As shown in FIG. 84, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out-ball counter (step S3901), and the light-transmitting monitor 39A is visible according to the visibility level corresponding to the value of the special out-ball counter after the addition. The light transmittance is controlled (step S3902). That is, the MPU 51 adjusts the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual level one level higher than the visual level before receiving the special out-ball detection command by controlling the voltage value applied to the translucent monitor 39A. (See FIG. 81 (B)).

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the special out-ball counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is the maximum transparency that allows the back of the translucent monitor 39A to be completely visible. When the value of the visibility level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3904, and when the value of the visibility level counter is not 4 (step S3903: No), the MPU 51 ends the visibility control process. To do.

<Step S3904>
When the value of the visibility level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the shading start counter to a predetermined value (step S3904). Here, the light-shielding start counter is completely invisible behind the translucent monitor 39A or is completely invisible from the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visibility level 4 (transparent state) in which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible. It is a counter for determining the timing of changing to the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visibility level 0 (light-shielding state) which is difficult to see, and is referred to in step S4003 in the light-shielding control process of FIG. 85 described later. The value of the light-shielding start counter is set to a value corresponding to a certain time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4 until when the visibility level is returned to 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 sets the shading start standby flag to on and ends the visual control process. Here, the light-shielding start standby flag is a flag indicating that the light-transmitting monitor 39A is waiting to change the visibility level to 0, and is referred to in step S4001 in the light-shielding process of FIG. 85 described later. The flag.

[Shading control processing]
In the shading control process, a process of setting the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A to 0 is executed after a lapse of a certain period of time. Here, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the shading control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 82.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 85, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the shading start standby flag, which is set to be on in step S3905 in the visual control process of FIG. 84, which will be described later, is set to ON. When the shading start standby flag is set to on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4002, and when the shading start waiting flag is set to off (step S4001: No), the said. The retention box return processing is completed.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
When the shading start standby flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the shading start counter set in step S3904 in the visual control process of FIG. 84 (step S4002). It is determined whether or not the value of the shading start counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a certain time has elapsed since the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A was set to 4. When the value of the shading start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4004, and when the value of the shading start counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4003: No), The shading control process is terminated.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
When the value of the light-shielding start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 controls the light-transmitting monitor 39A by controlling the level of the voltage value applied to the light-transmitting monitor 39A in the light-shielding state. The visible light transmittance corresponding to a certain visibility level 0 is set (step S4004). As a result, the time during which the entire special main display unit 37a is completely visible is restricted to a fixed time, so that it is possible to prevent the game set value from being left for a long time in a visible state. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the special out-ball counter to 0 (step S4005), sets the shading start standby flag to off (step S4006), and ends the retention box return process.

By the way, in the game machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, when the game ball 99 is hit into the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36, which is difficult to enter at the time of right-handed hitting such as a big hit game, the game ball 99 is gradually entered. The retention box 39 moves downward, and the game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a can be gradually confirmed.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment, instead of the retention box 39 in the fifth embodiment described above, the translucent monitor 39A is displayed on the front side of the special main display unit on which the game set value is displayed. Is arranged, and the visibility of the game set value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A. In addition, the overall visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is stepwise due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36, which is difficult to enter during a right-handed hit such as a jackpot game. Is changed to. Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the Kroon device 36 enters the special out ball mouth 363 at the time of right-handed hitting such as a jackpot game. .. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363, the game set value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is gradually clarified, so that the game set value is estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, the visibility level is adjusted by adjusting the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A, but the display color of each segment on the special main display unit 37a is adjusted. It is also conceivable to adjust the visibility level by adjusting the display color of the entire translucent monitor 39A.

It is also conceivable to adjust the visibility level stepwise from the light-shielded state to the transparent state by partially changing the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A. For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (D), a transparent region having a high visible light transmittance is stepped from a state in which the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A is low (light-shielding state). It is also possible to increase the number of light-transmitting monitors 39A so that the entire translucent monitor 39A becomes transparent in the end.

The example of FIG. 86 (A) is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the upper side to the lower side of the translucent monitor 39A, and the example of FIG. 86 (B) is shown in FIG. 86 (A). Contrary to the pattern, the transparent region gradually increases from the lower side to the upper side of the translucent monitor 39A. Further, the example of FIG. 86 (C) is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the right side to the left side of the translucent monitor 39A, and although not shown, the translucent monitor 39A A pattern in which the transparent area gradually increases from the left side to the right side is also conceivable. Further, the example of FIG. 86 (D) is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the upper left corner side of the translucent monitor 39A toward the lower right corner side of the diagonal side, and is not shown. A pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the other corner side of the translucent monitor 39A toward the diagonal corner side is also conceivable.
In this way, even when the transparent area is gradually increased by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is gradually clarified. In the process, you can guess the game setting value and enjoy it. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be grasped can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the visible level can be changed between the light-shielded state and the transparent state by increasing the visible light transmittance as a whole while giving a gradation to the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. Conceivable.

Further, in the present embodiment, while changing the translucent monitor 39A from the light-shielding state to the transparent state, a plurality of preset regions may be set as transparent regions in a predetermined order each time a specific condition is satisfied. Conceivable. As shown in FIG. 87 (A), for example, the plurality of regions may be set in portions corresponding to the respective segments A to G in the special main display unit 37a. Specifically, the central portion of each segment A to G is set as an area A to area G that can be a transparent area, and any one of the areas A to G is transparent each time a specific condition is satisfied. It is also conceivable to make it possible to determine whether or not each segment is lit by setting it as an area. Here, FIG. 87 (B) is an example in which regions A to G are changed to transparent regions in this order each time a specific condition is satisfied. In this way, while the translucent monitor 39A is changed from the light-shielded state to the transparent state, by setting the regions A to G as the transmissive region, it is possible to estimate the game set value step by step.

The order in which the areas A to G are set as the transparent area is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 87 (B), and may be set as appropriate. For example, it may be determined according to the game set value, or the game set value. It may be determined according to other factors other than (for example, ball ejection performance such as a base other than the game set value), or may be determined by lottery. Further, when a specific condition is satisfied, not only one region of regions A to G but also two or more regions may be designated as a transparent region. Further, it is not necessary to set all of the regions A to G as the transmission region while changing the translucent monitor 39A from the light-shielding state to the transparent state, and it is conceivable that some regions are sequentially designated as the transmission region. In this case, the order in which the part of the regions are set as the transparent regions may be appropriately determined according to the game setting value and the like, as in the case described above. Further, the plurality of regions are not limited to the regions A to G corresponding to the segments A to G in the special main display unit 37a, and may be set on the front side of a portion other than the segments A to G. In this case, the number of steps until the game setting value can be grasped can be increased, and when a specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to enjoy which of the areas A to G and the other areas is regarded as the transparent area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the translucent monitor 39A is gradually changed from the light-shielded state to the transparent state, but it may be changed at once from the light-shielded state to the transparent state.

Further, also in the present embodiment, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the base, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, etc. are determined by the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display unit 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, and the like. The ball ejection performance based on at least one winning opening may be specified.

[7th Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, and the game setting value cannot be visually recognized when the retention box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a is in the upper limit position. Alternatively, the case where it is considered difficult and the retention box 39 is gradually moved down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position so that a part or all of the game set values can be visually recognized has been described. Further, in the fifth embodiment described above, the case where the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the downward movement of the retention box 39 has been described.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the operation check of the retention box executed after the main power is turned on and the retention box during the jackpot game are driven, a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box arranged on the front side of the special main display unit. It is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the operation is performed and the abnormality processing is executed when a drive abnormality has occurred.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 88 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X5-X5 cutting line of FIG. 88, and FIG. 90 shows the forced discharge member at the operating position. FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89 in a certain case, and FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view of a region including a retention box and a special main display unit in the game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same basic configuration as the fifth embodiment described above, but enters the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36. The game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying in the retention box 39. Therefore, in a situation where it is not desirable for the game ball 99 to be retained in the retention box 39, for example, a failure of the motor 39a for driving the retention box 39, a drive mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 39a to the retention box 39, or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being retained in the retention box 39 in a situation where the retention box 39 may not be lowered to the lower movement level 4 due to a failure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from overflowing from the stay box 39 or staying in the special out ball passage 364.

The game machine 10 includes a forced discharge member 319B, an upper limit position detection sensor 40A, a lower limit position detection sensor 40B, and a translucent monitor 39A. Further, a notch 319A is provided on the back side of the lower end portion of the special out ball passage 364 of the Kroon device 36, and a forced discharge port 319C is provided above the special main display portion 37a on the game board 31. The notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C define a space for discharging the special out ball passage 364 of the Kroon device 36 to the game board 31. Further, on the back side of the game board 31, a discharge path 319D is provided to guide the game ball 99 that has passed through the forced discharge port 319C to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 35.

The forced discharge member 319B can be moved in the front-rear direction D1 between the standby position (see FIG. 89) and the operating position (see FIG. 90) by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. As shown in FIG. 89, in the standby position, the forced discharge member 319B does not exist between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and enters the special out ball mouth 363 of the croon device 36 to enter the special out ball. The game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the passage 364 can enter the retention box 39. Normally, the forced discharge member 319B is in the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, at the operating position, the forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and the game ball 99 (special out ball 99) discharged from the special out ball passage 364. ) Can be ejected to the back side of the game board 31, and the special out ball is restricted from entering the retention box 39. The forced discharge member 319B is moved to the operating position when there is a drive abnormality of the retention box 39. Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the retention box 39 is restricted by the forced discharge member 319B is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C.

The forced discharge member 319B is not limited to a configuration that can move in the front-rear direction D1, and other configurations can be adopted. For example, the forced discharge member 319B can move between a closed position where the forced discharge port 319C is closed and a closed position where the forced discharge port 319C is opened, and when the forced discharge member 319B is in the open position, a special out ball A configuration existing between the passage 364 and the retention box 39 is also conceivable.

The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are used to detect the position of the retention box 39. These upper limit position detection sensor 40A and lower limit position detection sensor 40B are optical sensors such as a reflection type sensor and an illuminance sensor, and are connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the outputs of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B can be mortared by the MPU 51. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B may be connected to the input / output I / F 42 of the main control device 4. In this case, a command corresponding to the output from the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, so that the position of the retention box 39 in the voice lamp control device 5 Is grasped.

As shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to 91 (C), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A is provided above the special main display unit 37a, and when the retention box 39 has a downward movement level of 0, the retention box 39 The presence can be detected, and the presence of the retention box 39 cannot be detected when the retention boxes 39 are at lower movement levels 1 to 4. On the other hand, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is provided below the discharge port 319, can detect the presence of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is at the lower movement level 4, and the retention box 39 is at the lower movement level 0 to 3. In some cases, the presence of the retention box 39 cannot be detected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A outputs a high level signal (H) when the downward movement level is 0 when operating normally. A low level signal (L) is output when the lower movement level is 1 to 4. Further, when the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is operating normally, it outputs a high level signal (H) when the lower movement level is 4, while it outputs a low level signal (H) when the lower movement level is 0 to 3. L) is output. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92B, when the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are operating normally, the output level of the signals output from these detection sensors 40A and 40B The combination is HL at the lower movement level 0, LL at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, and LH at the lower movement level 4.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the translucent monitor 39A is arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a, and controls the visibility of numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display unit 37a. To do. The translucent monitor 39A is the same as the translucent monitor 39A of the sixth embodiment described above, and the visible light transmittance is changed by being controlled by the MPU 51. As a result, the special main display unit 37a has a state in which the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A is high and the display content can be seen, and a state in which the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A is low and the display content cannot be seen. Alternatively, visibility is controlled between difficult conditions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92C, the translucent monitor 39A is in a normal state in which the display contents on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized when the residence box 39 is normally driven. When a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39, the display content on the special main display unit 37a is invisible or difficult to see.

Here, when the residence box 39 is not normally driven, the lower movement level grasped by the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level grasped by the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. It means that there is a difference between them. For example, if the retention box 39 is not moved up and down due to a malfunction of the motor 39a or the drive mechanism, or if the retention box 39 is moved up and down but the value of the downward movement level counter and the detection sensors 40A and 40B are different. , Corresponds to the case where the retention box 39 is not driven normally. Then, in the present embodiment, as described below, the voice lamp control device 5 checks the operation of the retention box during the start-up process and the jackpot game executed when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned on. Is executed. Further, in the operation check of the retention box 39, in addition to the start-up process and the jackpot game, for example, when the launch of the game ball 99 on the game machine 10 is stopped and a certain period of time elapses, a demonstration effect is produced on the symbol display unit 341 or the like. If it is executed, it is executed at a timing that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the residence box 39 is moved, such as when the RTC (real-time clock) effect is executed in the symbol display FIG. 341 or the like at a predetermined predetermined time. You may.

Instead of the translucent monitor 39A, it is conceivable that the numbers corresponding to the game set values displayed on the special main display unit 37a by other means are invisible or difficult to see. For example, the special main display unit 37a may be hidden by a movable member different from the retention box 39, the special main display unit 37a may be configured to be movable, and the special main display unit 37a may be placed on the back side of the retention box 39. By moving the special main display unit 37a, the special main display unit 37a may be retracted to an invisible or difficult position. It is also conceivable that the game set value cannot be grasped by turning off the power of the special main display unit 37a. In addition, instead of the translucent monitor 39A, it is conceivable to make the special main display unit 37a invisible or difficult by an optical action. For example, by arranging an optical member such as a light guide member or a diffusion member on the front side of the special main display unit 37a and injecting light from a light source into this optical member, the special main display unit 37a becomes invisible or difficult to see. It is also possible. On the contrary, by turning on the light source and injecting the light from the light source into the optical member, the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized, while by turning off the light source, the special main display unit 37a cannot be visually recognized. Alternatively, it may be difficult.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. The processing in the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is basically the same as that in the first embodiment described above, but in the present embodiment, the processing for checking the driving state of the residence box 39 is executed. Specifically, for example, when the retention box operation check process is executed in the start-up process executed when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and the retention box 39 is moved down in the retention box lowering process, and When the retention box 39 is moved up in the retention box return processing, an operation check is executed to check whether the drive state of the retention box 39 is abnormal.

[Stay box operation check processing]
In the retention box operation check process, the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40A determine whether or not the retention box 39 is operating normally, provided that the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are operating normally. It is checked using the position detection sensor 40B. That is, the retention box operation check process is executed after checking the operation of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B for any abnormality. To check the operation of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, for example, blink the operation check light sources arranged in the vicinity of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, or move the movable body. Is moved, and it is performed based on the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at that time. Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the retention box operation check process executed in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 5 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 93, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 to the lower movement level 4 (lower limit position) (step S4101), and after a predetermined time elapses (step S4102: Yes), returns the retention box 39 to the upper limit position. (Step S4103). Here, the reason why the retention box 39 is moved to the lower limit position and then returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined time is that the game ball 99 may remain in the retention box 39 when the main power supply of the game machine 10 is turned on. Because there is sex. That is, for example, when the main power supply of the game machine 10 is turned off during the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0 to 3 while the game ball 99 is retained in the retention box 39. is there. Therefore, by moving the retention box 39 to the lower limit position and then returning it to the upper limit position after a predetermined time, it is possible to achieve a state in which the game ball 99 does not exist inside the retention box 39, and the retention box 39 is moved down to level 0. It is possible to make it stand by at the upper limit position. Further, the predetermined time for stopping the residence box 39 at the lower limit position which is the lower movement level 4 is set to the time required for discharging the game balls 99 retained in the retention box 39, for example, about 2 to 10 seconds. is there.

Then, when the residence box 39 is returned to the lower movement level 0 (step S4103), the MPU 51 sets the value of the lower movement level counter to 0 (step S4104), and the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. The output level of the above is acquired, and the combination of the output levels of these detection sensors 40A and 40B is stored as the one for the downward movement level 0 (step S4105).

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
Next, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 stepwise to the lower movement levels 1 to 4 (step S4106) until the retention box 39 is moved down to the lower movement level 4 (step S4109: Yes), and the retention box 39 1 is added to the value of the lower movement level counter each time the lower movement level is moved (step S4107), and the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is stored at each lower movement level (step S4108).

<Steps S411 to S4116>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels is the combination when the retention box 39 is operating normally (see FIG. 92 (B)) when the values of the downward movement level counters are all 0 to 4. (Steps S411 to 4114). Then, when the values of the downward movement level counters are all 0 to 4 and the combination of output levels corresponds to the combination when the combination is operating normally (Yes in all of steps S411 to 4114), the retention box 39 Is normally driven, the residence box 39 is returned to the upper limit position where the downward movement level is 0 (step S4115), the value of the downward movement level counter is set to 0 (step S4116), and the retention is concerned. The box operation check process ends.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 does not correspond to the combination when the combination of the output levels when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is operating normally (No. in any of steps S411 to 4114). ), Since it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the drive state of the retention box 39, error processing is executed (step S4117), and the retention box operation check processing is terminated. Here, the causes when there is an abnormality in the drive state of the retention box 39 include, for example, an abnormality in the motor 39a and the drive system for moving the retention box 39 up and down, and a lower case when the motor 39a and the drive system are normal. It is conceivable that the value of the motion level counter and the downward motion level detected by the detection sensors 40A and 40B are inconsistent. The error handling will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 94.

[Error handling]
In the error handling, the error handling is executed according to the abnormal mode of the driving state of the retention box 39. Here, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the retention box operation check process of FIG. 93.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the values of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LH regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter. The MPU 51 is a detection sensor regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the values of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201: Yes). Since the combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always LH, and it is determined that the retention box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position of the lower movement level 4 and does not move, it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the first drive in step S4202 is performed. Shift processing to abnormal processing. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4203 when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No).

<Step S4202>
The MPU 51 executes the first drive abnormality processing (step S4202) when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the values of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201: Yes). , Ends the error handling. Here, when a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position of the lower movement level 4 and does not move, the display content of the special main display unit 37a is always visible. Therefore, in the first drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 displays the translucent monitor 39A arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a from the normal state in which the display contents on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized. The display content in the unit 37a is switched to an invisible or difficult visual restriction state (see FIG. 92C). As a result, even when the retention box 39 does not move from the lower limit position at the lower movement level 4, it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the display content (game set value) on the special main display unit 37a. Therefore, when the retention box 39 does not move at the lower limit position of the lower movement level 4, the special main display unit is displayed even though the game ball 99 is not inserted in the special out ball mouth 363 of the croon device 36. It is possible to prevent the game set value from being recognized by the player because the display content on the 37a is always visible.

Further, the MPU 51 may notify that the retention box 39 does not move in the first drive abnormality processing. In this case, for example, an image indicating that a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and a sound indicating that a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred is output from the speaker 26. Therefore, it is conceivable to notify that a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred. As a result, the game hall side can know that the drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred.

Further, on condition that there is no abnormality in the elements other than the retention box 39, the game hall side selects whether to shift to the customer waiting state in which the player can play the game or to disable the game by the player. It is also possible to do so. For example, on the symbol display unit 341, in addition to an image showing that a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred, an image for selecting whether or not to shift to the customer waiting state is displayed, and the upper plate 23 or the like is displayed. It is conceivable that the game hall side can select whether or not to shift to the customer waiting state by using the operation button 20 or the cross key (not shown) provided in the game hall. As a result, if there is no abnormality other than the drive abnormality of the residence box 39 and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to leave the judgment of whether or not to let the player use the game machine 10 to the game hall side. It will be possible.

Then, when the game hall side selects the customer waiting state, the technique of the sixth embodiment is applied to the number of balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36 (the number of special out balls). By selecting the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A accordingly, the visibility of the display content of the special main display unit 37a may be changed. For example, a sensor for detecting the game ball 99 such as a proximity sensor is provided near the forced discharge port 319C, and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is changed based on the output of this sensor to change the visible light transmittance of the special main display unit. The visibility of 37a may be changed. In this case, even when the retention box 39 does not move at the lower limit position of the lower movement level 4, the game machine 10 can be provided with a game property in which the game set value can be estimated or recognized. Further, instead of the translucent monitor 39A, even when the number corresponding to the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a by another means is made invisible or difficult to see, it is also special by the other means. The visibility of the main display unit 37a may be changed.

<Step S4203>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 has all the values of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4. It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in the above is HL (step S4203). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always HL regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter. The MPU 51 is a detection sensor regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the values of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes). Since it is determined that the combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always HL and the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position where the downward movement level is 0 and does not move, it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the second drive in step S4204 is performed. Move processing to abnormal processing. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4205 when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is not HL (step S4203: No).

<Step S4204>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B for all the values of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second drive abnormality processing (step S4204). , Ends the error handling. Here, when a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position where the downward movement level is 0 and does not move, the game ball 99 of the retention box 39 is introduced when the game ball 99 is introduced into the retention box 39. Cannot be discharged. Therefore, in the second drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 moves the forced discharge member 319B from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). As a result, the forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39. Therefore, in the jackpot game, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D is restricted from entering the retention box 39 by the forced discharge member 319B. Will be done. Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the retention box 39 is restricted by the forced discharge member 319B is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the forced discharge member 319B, the forced discharge port 319C and the discharge path 319D. .. As a result, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 363 is prevented from being entered into the retention box 39. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 having a capacity larger than the capacity from being accumulated in the retention box 39, and to prevent the game ball 99 from overflowing from the retention box 39, and also to the special out ball passage 364 of the Kroon device 36. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging. Therefore, even when the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position where the lower movement level is 0 and a drive abnormality that does not move occurs, the game machine 10 can execute the game as usual.

Further, in the second drive abnormality processing, as in the case of the first drive processing, it may be notified that the retention box 39 does not move. In this case as well, as in the case of the first drive process, the game hall side may be able to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state.

<Step S4205>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is neither LH nor HL (No in both steps S4201 and S4203), all of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LL (step S4205). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LL regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4. When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the lower movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 of the detection sensors 40A and 40B regardless of the lower movement levels 0 to 4. Since the combination of outputs is always LL and it is determined that the retention box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any of the lower movement levels 1 to 3 and a drive abnormality that does not move has occurred, the third step S4206 is performed. Shift processing to drive error processing. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LL in any of the lower movement levels 0 to 4, the MPU 51 has a lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the detection sensor. Since it is determined that a link abnormality different from the lower movement level based on 40A and 40B has occurred, the process shifts to the link abnormality processing in step S4207.

<Step S4206>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality processing (step S4206). ), Ends the error handling. Here, when a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any of the lower movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, a part of the display contents of the special main display unit 37a can be always visually recognized. When the game ball 99 is introduced into the stay box 39, the game ball 99 of the stay box 39 cannot be discharged. Therefore, in the third drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 executes the same processing as the second drive abnormality processing in addition to the same processing as the first drive abnormality processing. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the translucent monitor 39A arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a from the normal state in which the display contents on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized to the special main display unit 37a. The display content is switched to an invisible or difficult visual restriction state (see FIG. 92C), and the forced discharge member 319B is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). As a result, even when the retention box 39 does not move at any of the lower movement levels 1 to 3, it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the display content (game set value) on the special main display unit 37a. Further, in the jackpot game, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball mouth 363 of the Kroon device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 and into the retention box 39. It is possible to prevent the game ball from staying.

<Step S4207>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 is neither LH nor HL nor LL (No in all steps S4201, S4203 and S4205), MPU51 has a link abnormality. The process is executed (step S4207), and the error processing is terminated. Here, when a link abnormality occurs in which the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B are different (except when the retention box 39 does not move), the residence is retained. Box 39 cannot be operated normally. Therefore, in the link abnormality processing, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 to the position of the lower movement level based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. For example, when the combination of output levels from the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL, the retention box 39 is moved to the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0. Further, when the process of matching the link between the lower motion level based on the value of the lower motion level counter and the lower motion level based on the detection result by the detection sensors 40A and 40B is executed, the retention box operation check process is executed again. , It is preferable to check if the links are consistent. Then, if it is determined that the links are not consistent even by the re-staying box operation check process again, there is a possibility that the staying box 39 cannot be moved to a position of a part of the downward movement level, so that the link abnormality occurs. It may be notified that it will not be resolved. In this case as well, the game hall may be able to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state. Further, if the link abnormality is not resolved, the third drive abnormality processing may be executed.

By the way, when the visibility of the special main display unit 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the retention box 39, it is assumed that a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 occurs due to an abnormality of the motor 39a or the drive system connected to the retention box 39, for example. Will be done. In this case, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0, the game ball inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 4, the game set value is grasped because all of the special main display unit 37a remains visible. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, not only a part of the special main display unit 37a remains visible, but also the game ball inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the main power supply of the game machine 10 is turned on, an operation check process for checking whether or not a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred is executed. Then, when a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 has occurred, the abnormality processing is executed according to the position (downward movement level) at which the drive of the retention box 39 is stopped. Specifically, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0, the forced discharge member 319B is operated to force the special out ball to be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. The game ball 99 is prevented from entering the retention box 39. Further, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 4, the special main display unit 37a is made invisible or difficult by lowering the visible light transmission rate of the translucent monitor 39A. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lower movement levels 1 to 3, the forced discharge member 319B is operated and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game ball inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged, and it is possible to prevent all or part of the special main display unit 37a from remaining visible. As a result, even when a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 occurs, the game can be executed by the game machine 10.

[Stay box down processing]
In the dwell box lowering process of the present embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the position corresponding to the lowering level (see FIG. 74 (C)) according to the number of game balls staying in the dwelling box 39. The process of moving the retention box 39 down is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, before moving the residence box 39 downward, the matching between the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B is confirmed and matched. If not, the third drive error process is executed. Here, FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76.

<Steps S4301 to S4304>
As shown in FIG. 95, in the residence box downward processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first acquires a combination of output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B (step S4301). Then, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes) and the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not HL (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the above-mentioned error handling. The third drive error processing to be executed is executed (step S4303). Further, in the MPU 51, when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), that is, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 1 to 3, the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LL. If not (step S4304: Yes), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4303). That is, when the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B do not match, the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process. In other words, the reason why the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B do not match is that the retention box does not move, or it is simply matched. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the retention box 39 is stopped, and when the retention box 39 is not moving, it is not possible to determine at what downward movement level the retention box 39 is stopped. Therefore, the third drive can be used to deal with any drive abnormality. Execute abnormal processing.

It should be noted that the judgment as to whether the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are consistent is limited to before the retention box 39 is moved down. Instead, it may be performed after the retention box 39 is moved down, or it may be performed both before and after the retention box 39 is moved down.

[Stay box return processing]
In the retention box return processing of the present embodiment, a process of returning the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is executed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Will be done. Further, in the present embodiment, the matching between the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B is confirmed and matched before and after the residence box 39 is returned. If is not taken, the third drive abnormality process is executed. Here, FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box return processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75.

<Steps S4401 to S4404>
As shown in FIG. 96, in the retention box return processing of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 is the return timing of the retention box 39 (Yes in steps S3601 and S3603), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B Acquire a combination of output levels (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH (step S4402). That is, immediately before returning the residence box 39 from the lower movement level 4 to the lower movement level 0, the MPU 51 lowers based on the combination of the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. Determine if it matches the dynamic level. Further, when the residence box 39 is returned to the downward movement level 0 (step S3604), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL (step S4403). Then, the MPU 51 moves down based on the combination of the down movement level based on the value of the down movement level counter and the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B immediately after the timing of returning the residence box 39 or immediately after returning the residence box 39. If the levels do not match (No in step S4402 or S4403), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4304).

The retention box 39 is returned (upward) to determine whether the lower movement level based on the value of the lower movement level counter and the lower movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are consistent. Not limited to both before and after, only one of before and after returning the retention box 39 may be performed.

As described above, when the visibility of the special main display unit 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the retention box 39, for example, a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 occurs due to an abnormality of the motor 39a connected to the retention box 39 or the drive system. Is assumed. Then, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a drive abnormality in the retention box 39 by the operation check executed after the main power of the game machine 10 is turned on. Even if it is determined in this operation check that there is no drive abnormality, it is assumed that a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39 during the game.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when the retention box 39 is moved downward during the game and when the retention box 39 is returned (upward), it is determined whether the retention box 39 has a drive abnormality, and there is a drive abnormality. In some cases, drive error handling is executed. As a result, the game can be continued even if a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39 during the game. In particular, since the retention box 39 is moved up and down in the jackpot game, it is of great significance that the retention box 39 can continue the game when the drive of the retention box 39 is abnormal.

In the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

[Outline of Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below. In addition, in order to understand the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numerals. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, etc.), which is an index indicating the ball ejection performance,
The performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed, and
The performance information display control means (41) that causes the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information, and
A visual restriction means (39, 39A) that makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see, and
A visual state control means (39, 39A) that controls the visual restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. 51) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine during the game based on the visible part. Further, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to grasp the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine during the game. Therefore, by being able to estimate or grasp the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine during the game, the game playability is improved, and it is possible to give motivation to continue the game.

[Appendix A2]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
With the advantage determination probability setting means (41), the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) can be set from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the performance information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on the index in which the ball ejection performance of the game machine is more appropriately reflected. In addition, by displaying part or all of the information regarding the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the game machine is given based on.

[Appendix A3]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on the winning of the game ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1 or Appendix A2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to Appendix A3 includes performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the game machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, and if the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player continues the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether to do it.

[Appendix A4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball.
The game ball enters the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls fired on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. A unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the sphere is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the unit determination number of times calculated by the unit determination number of times calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the performance information includes the performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the number of unit judgments and enjoy it, and if the number of unit judgments can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix A5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and a general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game balls and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) and the number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening (313) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31). Further equipped with a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the payout number of game balls to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the ball ejection rate calculated by the ball ejection rate calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the performance information includes information on the ball output rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the ball ejection rate and enjoy it, and if the ball ejection rate can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the ball ejection rate. Granted.

[Appendix A6]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). Further equipped with a continuous bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous bonus ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, so that the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (residence ratio in the special game state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, and if the continuous bonus ratio can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous bonus ratio. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix A7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). With the bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entered into the second winning opening (315). ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) in which the electric bonus is supported, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the character ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (short-time game state) to receive support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning openings and second winning openings (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess and enjoy the character ratio, and if the character ratio can be grasped, decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix A8]
The visual restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) at a first position (upper limit position) that is invisible or difficult to see, and on the performance information display means (37a). It is possible to move the entire performance information to and from a visible second position (lower limit position).
The visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility limiting means (39) from the first position to a predetermined direction (downward) toward the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A7, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, a state in which a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually realized can be realized by a simple method of moving the visibility limiting means in a predetermined direction.

[Appendix A9]
The visual restriction means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times.
The visibility state control means (51) is such that the visibility limiting means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position every time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, wherein the) is moved stepwise in the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, the visibility limiting means is moved stepwise in a predetermined direction each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means is gradually expanded. To. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be grasped can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A10]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visibility state control means (51) places the visibility limiting means (39) at at least one intermediate position set between the first position and the second position. It is possible to stop,
At the intermediate position, a part of the performance information is visible, and two or more of a plurality of contents (for example, game setting values 1 to 6) set as the performance information (for example, game setting value) of the same type. The game machine according to Appendix A9, wherein the contents (for example, game setting values 2, 3, 5 and 6) are set at a position where it is impossible or difficult to distinguish (for example, an intermediate position of lower movement level 1).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A10, when the visibility limiting means is moved in a predetermined direction by satisfying a specific condition, a part of the performance information becomes visible, but it is impossible or difficult to distinguish two or more contents. Is. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down and estimate a smaller number from a plurality of contents before the contents of the performance information can be recognized by satisfying a specific condition. As a result, the player can estimate the performance information step by step and improve the accuracy of the estimation step by step by satisfying the specific condition a plurality of times. Therefore, such estimation of the performance information can be performed. You can enjoy the process of.

[Appendix A11]
The game according to Appendix A8, wherein the visual state control means (51) moves the visual restriction means (39) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A11, when a specific condition is satisfied, the visibility limiting means is moved from the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to see to the second position where the entire performance information can be seen. .. Therefore, the playability that the performance information can be visually recognized immediately when a specific condition is satisfied is given, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A12]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition limiting means (39) to the first position after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of movement of the visual viewing limiting means (39) from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A8 to Supplementary A11.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A12, the visibility limiting means returns the performance information to the first position, which is invisible or difficult to see, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement was started from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility limiting means from being present at a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where it can be estimated or grasped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who is not playing the game from guessing or grasping the performance information.

[Appendix A13]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is set, and
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) provided in the game area and the prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls, and
Discharge ports (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board.
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area above at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) and for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board. ,
With more
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A12, wherein the specific condition is that the game ball is inserted into the special discharge port (363).

In the game machine according to Appendix A13, when the game ball is inserted into the special discharge port, the visibility limiting means is moved in a predetermined direction, and the visible area of the performance information is expanded. Therefore, not only the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means but also the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the special outlet, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A14]
The visibility limiting means (39) can accommodate a game ball that has entered the special discharge port (363), and accommodates the game ball when it is moved to the second position by the visibility state control means (51). The game machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the game ball can be discharged.

In the game machine according to the appendix A14, the game ball of the visibility limiting means is discharged when the viewing limiting means is moved to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball of the visibility limiting means from overflowing.

[Appendix A15]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game.
A distribution device that distributes game balls to either the normal entry port (387) that guides the game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (316) to a position where it can enter, or the special discharge port (363). The gaming machine according to Appendix A13 or Appendix A14, further comprising (36).

In the game machine according to Appendix A15, in a special game in which a game ball can be inserted into a variable winning opening, the game ball is distributed to a normal entry port and a special discharge port by a sorting device. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visual state of the performance information. Therefore, since the opportunity to guess or grasp the performance information in the special game is given, it is possible to give the special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically the pleasure of guessing or grasping the performance information.

[Appendix A16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball.
A game ball launched in the left area of the game board (31) can enter the first winning opening (314).
A game ball launched in the right region of the game board (31) can enter the variable winning opening (316).
The addition A15, wherein the distribution device (36) distributes a game ball launched into the right side region to either the normal entry port (387) or the special discharge port (363). Game machine.

In the game machine related to Appendix A16, since the game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called left-handed hitting in order to receive the judgment of transition to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since the game ball fired in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called right-handed in the special game. Then, a distribution device provided with a special discharge port that is expected to change the visual state of the performance information due to the entry of the game ball can distribute the game ball launched in the right region of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, the visual state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the determination of transition to the special game, and the visual state of the performance information may change in the special game. In this way, since the visual state of the performance information can change when hitting right in a special game or the like, the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game for the player who is interested in guessing or grasping the performance information. It is possible to give motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A13 to Appendix A16, wherein the special discharge port (363) is more difficult to enter the ball than the normal entry port (387).

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, wherein the special discharge port (363) is provided above the normal ball entry port (387).

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17 or Appendix A18, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball entry port (387).

[Appendix A20]
The game according to any one of Supplementary A17 to Appendix A19, wherein the sorting device (36) has an inhibitory means (365) for inhibiting the entry of the game ball into the special discharge port (363). Machine.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A20, wherein the inhibiting means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A17 to A21, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special discharge port as compared with the normal entry port, so that it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, when the ball ejection performance is low, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage determination probability is low, so that the game on the game machine 10 is stopped at an early stage. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix A22]
The visual recognition limiting means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information by the performance information display means (37a) by the control by the visual recognition state control means (51). The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, the visual state of the performance information display means is changed by controlling the visual restriction means by the visual state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visual state of the performance information.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A 22, wherein the visual recognition limiting means (39A) is a translucent display device whose light-shielding property can be changed by being controlled by the visual recognition state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, by lowering the light-shielding property of a part or all of the translucent display device, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device.

[Appendix A24]
The visual state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information display means (37a) displays the performance information from the first state (visualization level 0) in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see. The visual state of the performance information is changed to a second state (visualization level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed in 37a) can be visually recognized.
From the first state to the second state, the visible area in the translucent display device (39A) is stepwise each time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix A23, which is characterized by being expanded to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, the transparent area in the translucent display device is gradually expanded each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually increases. It will be expanded. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that make a part of the performance information visible in a predetermined order.
The appendix A24 is characterized in that the visual state control means (51) makes a part of the performance information visible in one or more of the plurality of regions each time the specific condition is satisfied. The game machine described in.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A25, wherein the plurality of regions are arranged discretely in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix A27]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions and has a plurality of light emitting regions.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A25 or Appendix A26, wherein the plurality of regions are provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A25 to A27, every time a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the performance information can be visually recognized on the translucent display device in one or more of the plurality of regions. The performance information displayed on the information display means becomes gradually visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A28]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visual state control means (51) makes the translucent display device (39A) invisible or makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible. The feature is that the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from the first state (visualization level 0), which is difficult to see, to the second state (visualization level 4), which is visible. The gaming machine according to Appendix A22.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28, when a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device is changed from a light-shielding state in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see to a transparent state in which the entire performance information can be seen. .. Therefore, the playability that the performance information can be visually recognized immediately when a specific condition is satisfied is given, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A29]
The visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility limiting means (39) to the first position after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of movement of the visibility limiting means (39) from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A22 to Supplementary A28.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29, the visibility limiting means returns the performance information to the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to see after a lapse of a predetermined time after the movement is started from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility limiting means from being present at a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where it can be estimated or grasped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who is not playing the game from guessing or grasping the performance information.

[Appendix A30]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions and has a plurality of light emitting regions.
Addendum A22 to the performance information display means (37a) is characterized in that the specific performance information is displayed by the emission color or blinking pattern of the plurality of light emitting regions when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of A29.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, specific performance information can be easily specified by the emission color or blinking pattern of the emission-capable area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix A31]
Further provided with a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The specific condition is
The number of times the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number of times.
The result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special gaming state continuously for a predetermined number of times.
The result of the transition determination with the one to be shifted to the special gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times.
The total number of game balls fired in the game area of the game board (31) reaches a certain number, or the total number of game balls fired in the game area of the game board (31) and the plurality of winning openings. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Appendix A30, wherein the number of balls different from the total number of balls to be paid out due to the entry of the game balls into (313 to 316) exceeds a predetermined number.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31, since the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means when a specific condition is satisfied, the player may anticipate the timing when the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while anticipating the timing at which the performance information is displayed and looking forward to the arrival of that timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B1]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is set, and
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) provided in the game area and the prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls, and
Discharge ports (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board.
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area above at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) and discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board.
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, etc.), which is an index indicating the ball ejection performance,
The performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed, and
The performance information display control means (41) that causes the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information, and
A visual restriction means (39, 39A) that makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see, and
The visual restriction means (39, 39A) is controlled based on the entry of the game ball into the special discharge port (363), and at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is displayed. Visible state control means (51) that makes it visible, and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed based on the visible part. Further, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be grasped. Therefore, since the performance information can be estimated or grasped, the game playability is improved, and the motivation for continuing the game can be given.

Further, in the game machine according to the appendix B1, at least a part of the performance information can be visually recognized by inserting the game ball into the special discharge port. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved because the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the special outlet.

[Appendix B2]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
With the advantage determination probability setting means (41), the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) can be set from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the performance information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on the index in which the ball ejection performance of the game machine is more appropriately reflected. In addition, by displaying part or all of the information regarding the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the game machine is given based on.

[Appendix B3]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on the winning of the game ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to Appendix B3 includes performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the game machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, and if the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player continues the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether to do it.

[Appendix B4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball.
The game ball enters the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls fired on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. A unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the sphere is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the performance information includes the performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving a transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the number of unit judgments and enjoy it, and if the number of unit judgments can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and a general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game balls and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) and the number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening (313) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31). Further equipped with a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the payout number of game balls to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the ball ejection rate calculated by the ball ejection rate calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, the performance information includes information on the ball output rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the ball ejection rate and enjoy it, and if the ball ejection rate can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the ball ejection rate. Granted.

[Appendix B6]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). Further equipped with a continuous bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous bonus ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, so that the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (residence ratio in the special game state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, and if the continuous bonus ratio can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous bonus ratio. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). With the bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entered into the second winning opening (315). ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) in which the electric bonus is supported, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the character ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (short-time game state) to receive support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning openings and second winning openings (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess and enjoy the character ratio, and if the character ratio can be grasped, decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix B8]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game.
A distribution device (36) that distributes a game ball to either a normal ball entry port (387) that guides the game ball to a position where the game ball can enter the variable winning port (316) or the special discharge port (363). The gaming machines according to the appendices B1 to B7, further comprising.

In the game machine according to Appendix B8, in a special game in which a game ball can be inserted into a variable winning opening, the game ball is distributed to a normal entry port and a special discharge port by a sorting device. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visual state of the performance information. Therefore, since the opportunity to guess or grasp the performance information in the special game is given, it is possible to give the special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically the pleasure of guessing or grasping the performance information.

[Appendix B9]
Further provided with a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition.
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball.
A game ball launched in the left area of the game board (31) can enter the first winning opening (314).
A game ball launched in the right region of the game board (31) can enter the variable winning opening (316).
The addition B8, wherein the distribution device (36) distributes a game ball launched into the right side region to either the normal entry port (387) or the special discharge port (363). Game machine.

In the game machine related to Appendix B9, the game ball launched in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, so it is necessary to perform so-called left-handed in order to receive the judgment of transition to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since the game ball fired in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called right-handed in the special game. Then, a distribution device provided with a special discharge port that is expected to change the visual state of the performance information due to the entry of the game ball can distribute the game ball launched in the right region of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, the visual state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the determination of transition to the special game, and the visual state of the performance information may change in the special game. In this way, since the visual state of the performance information can change when hitting right in a special game or the like, the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game for the player who is interested in guessing or grasping the performance information. It is possible to give motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing.

[Appendix B10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B8 or Appendix B9, wherein the special discharge port (363) is more difficult to enter than the normal entry port (387).

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10, wherein the special discharge port (363) is provided above the normal ball entry port (387).

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10 or Appendix B11, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball entry port (387).

[Appendix B13]
The game according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B10 to B12, wherein the distribution device (36) has an inhibiting means (365) for inhibiting the entry of the game ball into the special discharge port (363). Machine.

[Appendix B14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B13, wherein the inhibiting means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices B10 to B14, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special discharge port as compared with the normal entry port, so that it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage determination probability is low, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped at the game machine 10 at an early stage.

[Appendix C1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, etc.), which is an index indicating the ball ejection performance,
The performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed, and
The performance information display control means (41) that causes the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information, and
A visual restriction means (39, 39A) that makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see, and
A visual state control means (39, 39A) that controls the visual restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. 51) and
With
The visual recognition limiting means (39A) is a gaming machine characterized in that the visual recognition state of the performance information by the performance information display means (37a) is changed by control by the visual recognition state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine during the game based on the visible part. Further, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to grasp the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine during the game. Therefore, by being able to estimate or grasp the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine during the game, the game playability is improved, and it is possible to give motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the visual state of the performance information display means is changed by controlling the visual restriction means by the visual state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visual state of the performance information.

[Appendix C2]
The visual state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information display means (37a) displays the performance information from the first state (visualization level 0) in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see. The visual state of the performance information is changed to a second state (visualization level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed in 37a) can be visually recognized.
From the first state to the second state, the visible area in the translucent display device (39A) is stepwise each time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, which is characterized by being expanded to.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, the transparent area in the translucent display device is gradually expanded each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually increases. It will be expanded. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, wherein the visibility limiting means (39A) is a translucent display device whose light-shielding property can be changed by control by the viewing state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, by lowering the light-shielding property of a part or all of the translucent display device, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the light-shielding property of the translucent display device.

[Appendix C4]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that make a part of the performance information visible in a predetermined order.
The supplementary note C3 is characterized in that the visual state control means (51) makes a part of the performance information visible in one or more of the plurality of regions each time the specific condition is satisfied. The game machine described in.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the plurality of regions are arranged discretely in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix C6]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions and has a plurality of light emitting regions.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4 or Appendix C5, wherein the plurality of regions are provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting regions.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C4 to C6, every time a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the performance information can be visually recognized on the translucent display device in one or more of the plurality of regions. The performance information displayed on the information display means becomes gradually visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually clarified, so that the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed until the performance information can be grasped. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the visual state control means (51) makes the translucent display device (39A) invisible or makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible. The feature is that the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from the first state (visualization level 0), which is difficult to see, to the second state (visualization level 4), which is visible. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C7, when a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device is changed from a light-shielding state in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see to a transparent state in which the entire performance information can be seen. .. Therefore, the playability that the performance information can be visually recognized immediately when a specific condition is satisfied is given, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C8]
The visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility limiting means (39) to the first position after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of movement of the visibility limiting means (39) from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C7.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C8, the visibility limiting means returns the performance information to the first position, which is invisible or difficult to see, after a predetermined time elapses after the movement is started from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility limiting means from being present at a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where it can be estimated or grasped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who is not playing the game from guessing or grasping the performance information.

[Appendix C9]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions and has a plurality of light emitting regions.
Addendum C1 to the performance information display means (37a), wherein when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific performance information is displayed according to the emission color or blinking pattern of the plurality of light emitting regions. The gaming machine described in any of C8.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C9, specific performance information can be easily specified by the emission color or blinking pattern of the emission-capable area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix C10]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
With the advantage determination probability setting means (41), the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) can be set from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
With more
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C9, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix C10, the performance information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on the index in which the ball ejection performance of the game machine is more appropriately reflected. In addition, by displaying part or all of the information regarding the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the game machine is given based on.

[Appendix C11]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on the winning of the game ball.
The game according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C10, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). Machine.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C11 includes performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning opening among the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the game machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, and if the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player continues the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether to do it.

[Appendix C12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball.
The game ball enters the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls fired on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. A unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the sphere is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C12, the performance information includes the performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the number of unit judgments and enjoy it, and if the number of unit judgments can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix C13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and a general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game balls and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) and the number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening (313) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31). Further equipped with a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the payout number of game balls to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the ball ejection rate calculated by the ball ejection rate calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C13, the performance information includes information on the ball output rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the ball ejection rate and enjoy it, and if the ball ejection rate can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the ball ejection rate. Granted.

[Appendix C14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). Further equipped with a continuous bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C14, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous bonus ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, so that the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (residence ratio in the special game state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, and if the continuous bonus ratio can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous bonus ratio. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix C15]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). With the bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entered into the second winning opening (315). ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) in which the electric bonus is supported, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the character ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (short-time game state) to receive support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning openings and second winning openings (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess and enjoy the character ratio, and if the character ratio can be grasped, decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix D1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, etc.), which is an index indicating the ball ejection performance,
The performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed, and
The performance information display control means (41) that causes the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information, and
A visual restriction means (39) that makes the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see, and
The visibility state control means (51) that controls the visibility limiting means (39) when a specific condition is satisfied and makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. When,
Anomaly determining means (51) for determining whether the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means (37a) is the target visual state of the performance information.
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

[Appendix D2]
When it is determined by the abnormality determining means (51) that an abnormality has occurred in the visual state of the performance information, the corresponding processing executing means (51) for executing the corresponding processing for the abnormality is further provided. The game machine described in Appendix D2.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D1 and the appendix D2, it is possible to determine whether the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is the visual state of the target performance information. This makes it possible to deal with cases where the visual state of the performance information is different from the intended one.

[Appendix D3]
The visibility of the visibility limiting means (39A) can be changed by control by the viewing state controlling means (51), and the forced viewing limiting means (39A) different from the viewing limiting means (39).
The forced visual recognition state control means (51) that controls the visibility of the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A), and
With more
The visual restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) at a first position (upper limit position) that is invisible or difficult to see, and on the performance information display means (37a). It is possible to move the entire performance information to and from a visible second position (lower limit position).
The abnormality determination means (51) can determine that the visibility limiting means (39) cannot move to the second position.
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility limiting means (39) cannot move to the second position, the corresponding processing executing means (51) has the performance information display means (37a). The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, wherein the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) is controlled so that the performance information in the above-mentioned performance information becomes invisible or difficult to see.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, when the visibility limiting means cannot be moved to the second position where the performance information cannot be seen or is difficult to see by the performance information displaying means, the performance of the performance information displaying means is performed by the forced viewing limiting means. Information can be invisible or difficult. This makes it possible to prevent the performance information display means from maintaining a state in which part or all of the performance information is visible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing or recognizing the performance information by making part or all of the performance information visible in the performance information display means visible even though the specific conditions are not satisfied.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) is capable of changing the visible light transmittance by control by the forced visual recognition state controlling means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the visibility of the performance information in the performance information display means can be changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the forced visual recognition state control means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information display means from maintaining a state in which a part or all of the performance information is visible by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, wherein the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) can be moved to a position covering the performance information displaying means (37a) by being controlled by the forced visual recognition state controlling means (51). ..

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the visibility of the performance information in the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means to a position covered by the forced visual state control means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information display means from maintaining a state in which a part or all of the performance information is visible by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D6]
The forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) includes a light source controlled by the forced visual recognition state control means (51) and an optical member capable of diffusing or guiding the incident light by incident light emitted from the light source. The gaming machine according to Appendix D3, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by turning on or off the light source. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information display means from maintaining a state in which a part or all of the performance information is visible by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D7]
The forced visual inspection state control means (51) is forced to perform when the specific condition is satisfied when it is determined by the abnormality determination means (51) that an abnormality has occurred in the visual inspection state of the performance information. The description in any of the appendices D3 to D6, which is characterized in that the visibility limiting means (39A) is controlled to make at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means (37a) visible. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D7, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by controlling the forced visual recognition limiting means when an abnormality occurs in the visual state of the performance information. It is said that. That is, when a drive abnormality of the visibility limiting means occurs, the visibility of the performance information is changed by the forced viewing limiting means instead of the viewing limiting means. As a result, even if the visibility of the performance information cannot be changed by the visibility limiting means, the visibility of the performance information can be changed by the forced viewing limiting means.

[Appendix D8]
The visual restriction means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) at a first position (upper limit position) that is invisible or difficult to see, and on the performance information display means (37a). It is possible to move the entire performance information to and from a visible second position (lower limit position).
The performance information display means (37a) can be moved to a position hidden by the visibility limiting means (39) at least when the visibility limiting means (39) is in the second position.
The abnormality determination means (51) can determine that the visibility limiting means (39) cannot move to the second position.
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility limiting means (39) cannot move to the second position, the corresponding processing executing means (51) has the performance information display means (37a). The gaming machine according to the appendix D3, wherein the player is moved to a position hidden by the visibility limiting means (39).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information display means from maintaining a state in which a part or all of the performance information is visible by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D9]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes a detection means (40A) capable of detecting that the visibility limiting means (39A) is in the second position.
The abnormality determination means (51) is controlled by the detection means (40A) to move the visibility limiting means (39) to the second position when the visibility state control means (51) controls the movement of the visibility limiting means (39). If it is not detected that (39A) is in the second position, the visual restriction means (39) determines that the second position cannot be moved, according to any of the appendices D3 to D8. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9, it can be determined by the detecting means whether the visibility limiting means cannot move to the second position. As a result, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the visibility limiting means by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D10]
The abnormality determining means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means (39) between the time when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on and the time when the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D9.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means between the time when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on and the time when the game can be started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being in a state where the game can be started in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means. In addition, when an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means, it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix D11]
The abnormality determination means (51) is any of the appendices D1 to D10, which determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means (39) after the game can be started. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D11, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means since the start of the game. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visibility limiting means after the game can be started, the abnormality in the visibility limiting means can be found, and the abnormality can be dealt with.

[Appendix D12]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the target visual state of the performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D11, further comprising a notification means (341, 26) for notifying that the information is being generated.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D12, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred when the visual state of the performance information is not the intended state. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means, and can respond to the abnormality.

[Appendix D13]
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the target visual state of the performance information, the game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D12, further comprising selection means (341, 20) capable of selecting whether or not the above is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D13, it is possible to select whether or not the game can be executed when the visual state of the performance information is not the intended state. As a result, if there is no abnormality other than the visual restriction means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the game hall side to decide whether or not to let the player use the game machine.

[Appendix D14]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
With the advantage determination probability setting means (41), the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) can be set from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1 to Appendix D13, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D14, the performance information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on the index in which the ball ejection performance of the game machine is more appropriately reflected. In addition, by displaying part or all of the information regarding the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the game machine is given based on.

[Appendix D15]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on the winning of the game ball.
The game according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). Machine.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D15 includes performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning opening among the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the game machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, and if the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player continues the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether to do it.

[Appendix D16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball.
The game ball enters the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls fired on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. A unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the sphere is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D16, the performance information includes the performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the number of unit judgments and enjoy it, and if the number of unit judgments can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix D17]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and a general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game balls and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) and the number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening (313) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31). Further equipped with a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the payout number of game balls to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the ball ejection rate calculated by the ball ejection rate calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D17, the performance information includes information on the ball output rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the ball ejection rate and enjoy it, and if the ball ejection rate can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the ball ejection rate. Granted.

[Appendix D18]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). Further equipped with a continuous bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D18, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous bonus ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, so that the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (residence ratio in the special game state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, and if the continuous bonus ratio can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous bonus ratio. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix D19]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). With the bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entered into the second winning opening (315). ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D19, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) in which the electric bonus is supported, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the character ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (short-time game state) to receive support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning openings and second winning openings (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess and enjoy the character ratio, and if the character ratio can be grasped, decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix E1]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is set, and
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) provided in the game area and the prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls, and
Discharge ports (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board.
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area above at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) and for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board. ,
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, number of unit jackpot lottery, base, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, etc.), which is an index indicating the ball ejection performance,
The performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed, and
The performance information display control means (41) that causes the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information, and
A visual restriction means (39) capable of accommodating a game ball that has entered the special discharge port (363) by making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see.
The visibility limiting means (39) is controlled on condition that the game ball is inserted into the visibility limiting means (39), and at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means (37a) is displayed. Visible state control means (51) that makes it visible,
Anomaly determining means (51) for determining whether the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means (37a) is the target visual state of the performance information.
The first state in which the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) is allowed to enter the visibility limiting means (39), and the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363). Switching means (319B) that can be switched between the second state that restricts entry into the visibility limiting means (39), and
When the abnormality determining means (51) determines that the visual state of the performance information is not the desired visual state, the switching control means (319B) controls the switching means (319B) to the second state. 51) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, wherein the visibility limiting means (39) can eject the accommodated gaming ball when it is moved to the second position by the viewing state controlling means (51).

In the gaming machines according to Appendix E1 and Appendix E2, when it is determined that the visual state of the performance information is not the desired visual state, the switching means is set to the second state to play the game to the visual restriction means. Ball entry is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the game ball being inserted into the visibility limiting means. For example, when the game ball of the visual restriction means is ejected when the visual restriction means is moved to the second position, and the visual restriction means cannot move to the second position where the game ball can be ejected, the visual recognition is performed. It is prevented that a game ball is inserted into the limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball having a capacity larger than the capacity from staying in the visibility limiting means and to prevent the game ball from overflowing from the viewing limiting means. Therefore, even when a drive abnormality occurs in which the visibility limiting means is not moved from the first position, it is possible to execute the game as usual in the game machine.

[Appendix E3]
The switching means (319B) has a third position (standby position) that allows a game ball that has entered the special discharge port (363) to enter the visibility limiting means (39), and the special discharge port. It is possible to move between the game ball entered in (363) and the fourth position (operating position) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the visibility limiting means (39).
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual restriction means (39) is not in the second position, the switching control means (51) moves the switching means (319B) from the third position. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1 or Appendix E2, which is characterized by being moved to the fourth position.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, by moving the switching means from the third position to the fourth position, it is possible to restrict the entry of the gaming ball into the special discharge port into the visibility limiting means. Thereby, with a simple configuration and control, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the visibility limiting means when an abnormality occurs in the visibility limiting means.

[Appendix E4]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes a detection means (40B) capable of detecting that the visibility limiting means (39A) is in the second position.
The abnormality determination means (51) is controlled by the detection means (40B) to move the visibility limiting means (39) to the second position when the visibility state control means (51) controls the movement of the visibility limiting means (39). The game according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E3, wherein when it is not detected that (39A) is in the second position, it is determined that the visibility limiting means (39) is not in the second position. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, it can be determined by the detecting means that the visibility limiting means is not in the second position. As a result, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the visibility limiting means by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix E5]
The abnormality determining means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means (39) between the time when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on and the time when the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E4.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means between the time when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on and the time when the game can be started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being in a state where the game can be started in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means. In addition, when an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means, it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix E6]
The abnormality determination means (51) is described in any one of the appendices E1 to E5, wherein the abnormality determination means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means (39) after the game is started. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means since the start of the game. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visibility limiting means after the game can be started, the abnormality in the visibility limiting means can be found, and the abnormality can be dealt with.

[Appendix E7]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the target visual state of the performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E6, further comprising a notification means (341, 26) for notifying that the information is being played.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred when the visual state of the performance information is not the intended state. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visibility limiting means, and can respond to the abnormality.

[Appendix E8]
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the target visual state of the performance information, the game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E7, further comprising selection means (341, 20) capable of selecting whether or not the above is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8, it is possible to select whether or not the game can be executed when the visual state of the performance information is not the intended state. As a result, if there is no abnormality other than the visual restriction means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the game hall side to decide whether or not to let the player use the game machine.

[Appendix E9]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and
With the advantage determination probability setting means (41), the advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) can be set from a plurality of different advantage determination probabilities. ,
With more
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E8, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E9, the performance information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a great influence on the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball ejection performance based on the information regarding the advantage determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball ejection performance based on the index in which the ball ejection performance of the game machine is more appropriately reflected. In addition, by displaying part or all of the information regarding the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player can guess and enjoy the advantage determination probability, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability. The opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the game machine is given based on.

[Appendix E10]
It is further equipped with a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on the winning of the game ball.
The game according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E9, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball ejection performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). Machine.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E10 includes performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on at least one winning opening among the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player can, for example, make an individual difference or a secular change at the time of manufacturing the game machine. It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the ball ejection performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening between the game machines. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening, and if the ball ejection performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player continues the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether to do it.

[Appendix E11]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of a game ball.
The game ball enters the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of balls fired on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. A unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) triggered by the sphere is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11, the performance information includes the performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening until the number of difference balls reaches a minus of the predetermined number of balls or the number of shot balls of the game ball reaches a specific number of balls. This is the number of times the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of receiving the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low probability mode is not the time saving mode). Therefore, the player can infer or recognize the information regarding the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the number of unit determinations, so that the player can know the susceptibility to the transition determination. Become. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the number of unit judgments and enjoy it, and if the number of unit judgments can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix E12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are made to pay out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity and a general winning opening (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the winning of the game balls and has a function different from that of the first winning opening. Including
The number of balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched into the first winning opening (314) and the number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening (313) with respect to the number of balls to be launched to the game board (31). Further equipped with a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating the payout rate (base), which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the payout number of game balls to the incoming ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the ball ejection rate calculated by the ball ejection rate calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12, the performance information includes information on the ball output rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the ball output rate is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can win a prize in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know how easy it is. As a result, the player has an opportunity to estimate the ball ejection rate and enjoy it, and if the ball ejection rate can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the ball ejection rate. Granted.

[Appendix E13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state.
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). Further equipped with a continuous bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the continuous accessory ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E13, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the payout to the game balls to the variable winning openings. It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (balls in the special game state). It is an index showing the rate). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous bonus ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the continuous bonus ratio, so that the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (residence ratio in the special game state) and the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the continuous bonus ratio, and if the continuous bonus ratio can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous bonus ratio. You will be given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix E14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are the first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the game by the support of the electric accessory. The second winning opening (315), which allows the ball to enter and gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball, and the entry of the game ball in the special gaming state. Including possible variable winning openings (316),
In the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316), for the game ball to enter the variable winning openings (316). With the bonus ratio calculation means (41) for calculating the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entered into the second winning opening (315). ,
With more
The gaming machine according to Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculating means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E14, the performance information includes information on the accessory ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls to enter the plurality of winning openings, and the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. That is, the bonus ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (short-time game state) in which the electric bonus is supported, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information regarding the character ratio, the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (short-time game state) to receive support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning openings and second winning openings (exit in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to guess and enjoy the character ratio, and if the character ratio can be grasped, decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

10: Game machine 313: General winning opening 314: First winning opening 315: Second winning opening 316: Variable winning opening 341: Design display unit 35a: Special out ball sensor 36: Crune device 363: Special out ball opening 364: Special Out ball passage 365: Obstruction wall 367: Normal entry port 368: Normal passage 37a: Special main display unit 38: Sub image display unit 39: Retention box 39A: Translucent monitor 319: Discharge port 319B: Forced discharge member 4: Main controller 40A: Upper limit position detection sensor 40B: Lower limit position detection sensor 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
412d: Game information storage area 4A: Performance information display device 43: Performance display monitor 44: Performance display switch 45: Game setting value display unit 46: Setting value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (3)

A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
A storage means for storing performance information, which is an index indicating ball ejection performance,
Performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means, and
A performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means,
The first position where the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is invisible or difficult to see from a specific direction on the front, and the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means are shown in the specific direction on the front. Visible restriction means that can be moved from the second position that can be seen from
When the visibility limiting means is moved from the first position toward the second position, the return determining means for determining whether or not the visibility limiting means has returned to the first position,
A notification means that performs a predetermined notification based on the determination result by the return determination means, and
A defining means that regulates the movement of the visibility limiting means between the first position and the second position in the special gaming state.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the visibility limiting means makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible from the specific direction on the front surface.
The defined means enables the visual restriction means to move from the first position to the second position when the movement start condition is satisfied in the special gaming state, and the movement start condition is satisfied in the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the movement of the visibility limiting means from the first position to the second position is restricted when this is not done. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notification means performs an error notification when the return determination means determines that the visibility limiting means does not return to the first position. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the notification means performs the error notification by voice.

Images